Alarm Monitoring Control and Power Management

AD-0377 / Item number 0400151 /
DataChief C20
Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management
Instruction manual
Document revisions
Rev A B C D Date 02.02.2002 20.11.2002 05.02.2003 Written by KGr KGr KGr Checked by AHo AHo BW Approved by KOP KOP KOP
The original signatures are recorded in the companys logistic database.
High voltage safety warning

The voltages used to power this equipment are potentially lethal. Even 110 volts can kill. Whenever possible, the following precautionary measures should be taken before any work is carried out inside the equipment: Switch off all high-voltage power supplies. Check the operation of any door interlocks and any other safety devices. Completely discharge all high-voltage capacitors. It should be noted that interlocks and safety devices are normally located only at regular access points, and high voltages may be exposed during dismantling. NEVER WORK ALONE ON HIGH-VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT!
1 2 3
Lay the victim flat on his back and loosen any tight clothing (collar, tie, belt etc.). Open his mouth and check for and remove any false teeth, chewing gum etc. Check if the victim is breathing. If not, check if his heart is beating. The pulse is normally easily found in the main arteries of the neck, either side of the throat, up under the chin.
If his heart is beating but he is not breathing, commence ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION. If the victims heart is not beating, commence EXTERNAL CARDIAC MASSAGE (ECM). Continue to shout for assistance till someone arrives.
EXTERNAL CARDIAC MASSAGE 1

Kneel beside the victim. Place the heel of one hand in the centre of his chest, at a position half way between the notch between the collar-bones at the top of his chest, and the dip in the breast-bone at the base of his rib cage. Place the other hand on top of the first. Keeping the arms straight and using your entire weight, press down rapidly so that the breast bone is depressed four- five cm, then release the pressure. Repeat rhythmically at a rate of one cycle per second. This will be hard work, but keep going. His life depends on YOU. Do not worry about breaking his ribs - these will heal if he survives.
FIRST AID IN THE EVENT OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

Normally, even a high voltage electric shock will not kill instantly. The victim can still be revived even when his breathing and heart-beat have ceased. Could YOU save someones life? In the event of electric shock, the correct actions, performed quickly may well save the victims life. Make sure you know what to do! Immediate action While shouting for help, remove the source of power from the victim. Switch off the supply if possible, or using a dry, non-conductive material (rubber gloves, broom handle etc.) to insulate yourself, separate the victim from the source. If the voltage exceeds 1000 volts, switch off the supply and be ready to catch the victim. Take care- do not become a victim yourself. Commence first aid on the spot. Continue to shout for assistance till someone arrives.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
1 Kneel besides the victims head. Place one hand under his neck and lift, allowing his head to fall back. This will lift his tongue and open the air passage in his throat. 2 Place the palm of the hand on his forehead to maintain the chin-up position. 3 Using the index finger and thumb of the same hand, pinch the victims nostrils closed. Open his mouth. 4 Take a deep breath and cover his mouth with yours. Blow steadily into his lungs to expand his chest. Remove your mouth from his to allow the air to escape from his chest. You should be able to see his chest deflate. 5 Repeat the inflation-deflation cycle at a rate of about 12 cycles per minute till the victim begins to breath normally again.
Remove the victim to a hospital as soon as possible, but do not interrupt the artificial respiration and EMC cycles till his heart beat and breathing returns. If started quickly and performed correctly, the resuscitation methods described will keep a sufficient volume of oxygenated blood flowing trough the victims body to allow full recovery. Proficiency in the resuscitation methods can only be achieved trough training. All personnel concerned should attend courses on a regular basis. Remember, someones life could depend on you.
COMBINING EMC AND ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION

If you are alone, perform ONE cycle of artificial respiration for every FIVE cycles of EMC. This will be hard work, but keep going. His life depends on YOU! If there are other people available to help, one should perform the EMC while one performs the artificial respiration for every five cycles of EMC. It will be much more efficient with two people. Once the victims heart is beating and he is breathing, roll him onto his side and support him in that position. As consciousness returns he may vomit, and this will allow any liquid to drain out of his mouth.
DO YOU KNOW WHAT TO DO?
Warnings and Cautions

WARNING Lethal voltages This system is not fitted with safety interlocks and lethal voltages may be exposed when access covers are removed. Only persons qualified and authorised must remove covers and these persons should always take extreme care once the covers are removed. WARNING Fire If a fire condition arises, emission of toxic fumes can be anticipated from burning insulation, printed circuit boards, ETC. WARNING Health hazard When cleaning the inside of this system, do not inhale the dust. The dust is a temporary health hazard, depending on individual allergies. Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS disclaims any responsibility for damage or injury caused by improper installation, use or maintenance of the equipment. Caution Electrostatic sensitive device Certain semiconductive devices used in this equipment are liable to damage due to static voltage. Observe all precautions for handling of semiconductive sensitive devices. Note This document The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this document. 2002 Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS. All rights reserved. No part of this work covered by the copyright hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied without prior permission from Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS. Manufacturer Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS Bekkajordet 8 A P.O. Box 1009 N-3194 Horten, NORWAY Telephone switchboard: +47 33 03 20 00 Fax: +47 85 02 80 82 www.kongsberg.com
Purpose
The reader This instruction manual describes how to use the DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management controls and display facilities. It is intended for system operators. He/she should be experienced in the operation of Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management and have basic knowledge of personal computers or should have attended a Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems training course. Note Due to the flexible nature of DataChief C20 not all systems described in this manual are relevant for all deliveries. DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management is a registered trademark of Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems. Windows NT and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Figure 1 DataChief C20 Remote Operator Station
Instruction manual
Chapters
1 Functional description
This chapter presents a functional description of the DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management.. Refer to page 1.
Getting started
This chapter teaches you how to use the basic control functions of the DataChief C20. It is intended for personnel just starting to use the system. Refer to page 58.
Alarm and monitoring system

This chapter contains step by step procedures for operation of the alarm and monitoring system. Refer to page 82.
Process control system

This chapter contains a full descriptions of the process control system for all all operator station types. Refer to page 150.
Power management system

This chapter contains a full descriptions of the power management system for all operator station types. Refer to page 186.
Reference guide
This chapter contain software- related information that can be reached from one or several different types of operator locations (ROS, LOS etc.) . Refer to page 214.
Maintenance
This chapter explains how to keep the system in good working order and what to do if the system fails. Refer to page 231.
Replaceable parts
This chapter contains a list of replaceable parts including part numbers. Drawings of the main units are found here. Refer to page 271.
Appendix
This chapter contains abbreviations and references. Refer to page 288.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
IX
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
Document history
The information on this page is for internal use.
Rev.A Rev.B First edition. Included 6 months and yearly maintenance, ShipViewer user information, how to use the service console, procedures for unit replacement, how alarms are printed after a blackout, how to configure a new DPU channel and information about the new VCC, C3 and C4 Distributed Processing Units. Added section about password access. The manual is updated to comply with software version DC 60052.07.04. Updated section about power management (AD- 0377 and AD- 0379). Updated section about process control system (AD- 0377 and AD- 0378). Added information about the Midi operator station. Included various minor changes and corrections. Reorganized normal operating information under thee main headings; Alarm and Monitoring, Process Control and Power Management System. Updated the parts lists.
Rev.C
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Instruction manual
Table of contents
1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Design principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2 Building blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.3 Decentralised system architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.4 Centralised operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1 Remote Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2 Midi operator station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.3 Local operator station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.4 Watch Bridge Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.5 Watch Cabin Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.6 ShipViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.7 Distributed Processing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.8 Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Software components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1 Humane Machine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2 System functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3 Process control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.4 Power management system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.2 Operator Control Panel (OCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.3 Midi Operator Station (MOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.4 Local Operator Station (LOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.5 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.6 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.7 Remote Analogue Input (RAi-16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.8 Remote Analogue Input (RAi-10tc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.9 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32 & RDi-32a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.10 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.11 Remote Digital Output (RDo-16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.12 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 2 3 3 5 6 8 11 12 14 15 16 17 19 20 26 29 29 32 35 39 44 44 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 48 49 50 50
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
XI
1.6.13 1.6.14 1.6.15 1.6.16 1.6.17 1.6.18 2
Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Input/Output (RIO-C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Input/Output (RIO-C4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51 52 54 55 56 56 58 58 59 59 63 64 66 66 66 67 69 71 71 73 74 75 75 76 76 76 78 78 79 79 79 80 80 81 81 81 81
GETTING STARTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Using the Remote Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Understanding the Operator Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Systems without Operator Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 Understanding the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Using the Midi Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Understanding the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.3 Understanding the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.4 Menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Using the Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.1 Understanding the Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.2 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.3 How to access menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.4 How to move between menu levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.5 How to move inside a menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 The watch calling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.2 How does the Watch Calling repeat alarm feature work . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Using the Watch Bridge Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.1 Explanation of controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.2 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.3 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.4 How to test the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 Using the Watch Cabin Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.1 Explanation of controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.2 How to respond to alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.3 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.4 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.5 How to test the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XII
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Instruction manual
ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Remote Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 How to handle alarm events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 How alarms are printed after a black-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3 How to display alarm summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.4 How to display alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.5 How to display alarm group information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.6 How to display counters and reset counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.7 How to display offscan alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.8 How to toggle between group and alarm display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.9 How to acknowledge alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.10 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.11 How to print a Complete log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.12 How to print an Alarm Summery log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.13 How to print a Level Correction log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.14 How to print a Tank log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.15 How to print a Counters log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.16 How to print an Inhibit log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.17 How to print an Offscan log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.18 How to print Group log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.19 How to print a Selected points log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.20 How to stop a printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.21 How to display system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.22 About password access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.23 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.24 Info field enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.25 How to enable changing of Eng. unit/counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.26 How to enable resetting of counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.27 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.28 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.29 How to silence the Operator Control Panel buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.30 How to set tags to offscan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.31 How to change alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.32 How to change alarm delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.33 How to access the Watch Calling configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.34 How to set the On Duty engineer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82 82 83 83 83 84 84 84 85 85 86 86 87 88 89 90 90 90 90 90 90 91 91 92 92 94 95 95 96 96 97 97 98 98 98 98 99
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
XIII
3.2.35 3.2.36 3.2.37 3.2.38 3.2.39 3.2.40 3.2.41 3.2.42 3.2.43 3.2.44 3.2.45 3.2.46 3.2.47 3.2.48 3.2.49 3.2.50 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2
How to select the Watch Responsible location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to call the On Duty engineer or All engineers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to define the engineer qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to define watch calling Off-Duty mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to define Watch Calling panel groups for on duty engineers . . . . How to change time zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to change system time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to make your own list of selected tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to change a list of selected tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to set the interval for selected points log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to make your own trend display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to make your own bargraph display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to change tag parameters for an analogue channel . . . . . . . . . . . How to change tag parameters for a digital channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to change the Autolog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to change Deviation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Midi Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to handle alarm events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to display alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to display alarm summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to display alarm group information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to set the keyboard and screen configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to change access level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to display information about DPUs, tags and tag details . . . . . . . How to change tag parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to change alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to change alarm delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to view alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to acknowledge alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to turn the sound off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to display and interpret alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to display and interpret alarm details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to display alarm summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watch calling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to receive a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to respond to alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100 101 103 104 105 107 107 109 110 111 112 115 117 120 121 123 126 126 126 127 127 128 128 129 130 134 134 135 135 135 135 135 137 138 139 139 139
XIV
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Instruction manual
3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.6 3.6.1 3.7 3.7.1 3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4 3.8.5 3.8.6 4
How to call the ON DUTY engineer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to transfer watch responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to accept watch responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watch Bridge Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to display alarm information when in off duty mode . . . . . . . . . Watch Cabin Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to display alarm information when duty mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using ShipViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main ShipViewer functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the ShipViewer display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation to the displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to print displayed information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save ShipViewer images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to view saved mimic diagram files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139 140 140 140 140 141 141 142 142 142 143 147 148 148
PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 4.2 About the process control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 4.3 Remote Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 4.3.1 How to operate a pump starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 4.3.2 How to operate a fan starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 4.3.3 How to operate a compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 4.3.4 How to open or close valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 4.3.5 How to operate a PID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 4.4 Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 4.4.1 How to operate pumps or fans from the Local Operator Station . . . . . 180 4.4.2 How to operate valves from the Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . 183 POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 4.2 About the power management system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 4.3 Remote Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 4.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 4.3.2 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 4.3.3 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control . . . . . . . . . . 193 4.3.4 How to operate a generator set without start, stop with adjustable load setpoint 194 4.3.5 How to operate the main switchboard controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 4.3.6 How to operate a bus tie breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
XV
4.3.7 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 5
How to operate the one touch auto sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Midi Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 How to operate the main switchboard controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control . . . . . . . . . . 209 How to operate a generator set without start, stop with adjustable load setpoint 211 How to operate a bus tie breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
REFERENCE GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 5.2 Tag type overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 5.2.1 Basic tag types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 5.2.2 Analogue out tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 5.2.3 Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 5.3 Alarm and monitoring parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 5.3.1 Analogue input tag items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 5.3.2 Alarm and event limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 5.3.3 Filter time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 5.3.4 Dynamic deadband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 5.3.5 Scaling parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 5.3.6 Counter input tag items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 5.3.7 Digital input tag items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 5.3.8 Exhaust mean value tag items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 5.3.9 Exhaust deviation tag items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 5.3.10 Common submenu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 5.3.11 Alarm submenu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 5.4 Engineers safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 5.4.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 5.4.2 Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 5.4.3 Remote Operator Station control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 5.4.4 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 6.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 6.3 Unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 6.3.1 Recommended tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
XVI
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Instruction manual
6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.5.5 6.5.6 6.5.7 6.5.8 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 6.8 6.8.1 6.8.2 6.8.3 6.9 6.9.1 6.9.2 6.10 6.10.1 6.10.2 6.10.3 6.10.4 6.10.5 7
Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weekly maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-monthly maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yearly maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Remote Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to use the Service console program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to set up a Remote Operator Station from an image file . . . . . . . How to shut down a Remote Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to replace colour graphics displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to replace printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to replace Operator Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to replace Remote Operator Station PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to install the Remote Operator Station software . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to install the Midi Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Midi Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to replace Midi Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Local Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to replace Local Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to recommision a Local Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting the Watch Calling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting flow diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to replace Watch Calling units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Distributed Processing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to handle Distributed Processing Units error codes . . . . . . . . . . . How to handle Distributed Processing Units communication errors . . How to start or stop Remote Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to configure a new DPU channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to replace Distributed Processing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
233 233 233 235 235 236 236 243 245 245 246 246 246 247 250 250 251 252 253 253 253 255 255 256 256 257 257 259 262 262 263 265 265 269
REPLACEABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 7.2 How to get in touch with us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
XVII
7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 5
Consumable spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plugs and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
271 271 272 272 273 274
APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 5.2 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 5.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 5.2.2 Alarm list abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 5.3 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
XVIII
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Functional description
1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction
This chapter introduces the DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management. The following subjects are covered: - Overview - Design principles - System components - Software components - Technical specifications
1.1.1
Software version
This manual complies with DataChief C20 software version DC 60052.07.04.
Figure 2 Typical engine control room fitted with DataChief C20.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.2
Overview
The DataChief C20 is an Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management. Modular design allows flexibility in configuring the system to individual requirements, covering the whole range from low complexity alarm systems to highly integrated alarm and monitoring systems with advanced process control. Sub-systems can include all or any combination of the following: Alarm and monitoring system. Auxiliary control system. Power management system. Propulsion control. Ballast automation system. HVAC (air conditioning). Management support. Reefer monitoring Fire system
Note
This document describes the DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management. The system is based on Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems unified automation concept, where each individual ship configuration is built up using standard modules communicating on CAN- and local area networks. DataChief C20 is configurable for all ship types, including oil and gas tankers, bulk carriers, passenger vessels, container and Ro-Ro vessels, reefers and other special purpose vessels. The main purpose of the system is to give ships officers all the basic alarms and status information they require in order to maintain safe and efficient operation of the machinery and other relevant equipment. DataChief C20 complies with the requirements of IMO, local maritime authorities, IACS, and eleven classification societies. It is designed to meet the classification societies requirements for periodically unmanned engine room operation. The system conforms to all rules and regulations, and all modules are type approved. The system incorporates the latest advances in hardware and software technology. DataChief C20 is developed to strict military QA standards.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.3
Design principles
1.3.1 General
Alarm groups
All alarms and monitored values are divided into alarm groups. Any alarm can only be part of one group. Each alarm group has a dedicated button on the operator control panel. If only standard personal computer keyboard is provided the operator control panel is displayed on the colour graphics display and works in the same way as the physical panel. Active alarms are indicated by a flashing light (unacknowledged alarm) or steady light (acknowledged alarm).
Alarm types Alarm detection for analogue signals
The following functions are included: Instrument failure alarms. Low-low process alarms with or without action (slow-down). Low process alarms. High process alarms. High-high process alarms with or without action (slow-down). Return to normal detection with dead-band to avoid alarm fluctuations. Adjustable filter factors to filter fluctuations in the incoming signals. Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages.
Alarm detection for on/off (two state) signals
The following functions are included: High process alarms (open or closed). Return to normal detection. Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages.
Alarm detection for on/off signals with line check
The following functions are included: High process alarms (open or closed). Line broken alarm. Line short alarm.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Return to normal detection. Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages.
Inhibit alarm
Some alarms are conditional and will be inhibited when a specified condition is present. This function is accomplished by defining a signal as an inhibit source for a specified alarm or a specified group of alarms. An adjustable time delay is available to extend the inhibit situation for each signal.
Alarm indication
The four last alarms detected by the system will be indicated in the lower right corner of the colour graphics display. The alarm tag, description and state will be displayed. The following states are used by the system. On/off signal open contact alarm: OPEN On/off signal closed contact alarm: CLOSED On/off signal broken alarm: BROKEN On/off signal short alarm: SHORT Analogue signal instrument failure, signal value outside low range: IFL (Instrument Failure Low) Analogue signal instrument failure, signal value outside high range: IFH (Instrument Failure High) Analogue signal high alarm: HIGH Analogue signal low alarm: LOW Analogue signal high-high alarm: HI-HI Analogue signal low-low alarm: LO-LO On/off or analogue sensor taken out of scanning: OFFSC On/off or analogue signal return from alarm: RETURN To visually distinguish between the alarm states different colours have been used. The meaning of the different colours are listed below: Normal state: GREEN Alarm state, not acknowledged: RED with asterisk (*) State changed from not acknowledged to normal: RED Alarm state, acknowledged: YELLOW Alarm state, inhibited: BLUE Not updated or invalid values: GREY
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Alarm and monitoring displays
There are several display pages for presenting alarms and monitored values. The alarm pages comprise: Alarm group display page (activated from group alarm push-buttons). Alarm summary page, containing a list of all active alarms. Alarm history page, containing a consecutive list of time-stamped alarms. The monitoring pages include: Group display containing a list of all measuring points within an alarm group. Selected points display (and logging facility). Tag details, giving detailed information about each measuring point in the system.
1.3.2
Building blocks
The DataChief C20 is a modular system that allows us to meet individual ship owners requirements using standard modules. The main building blocks of the DataChief C20 are: Distributed Processing Units: Their main functions are to monitor analogue or digital sensors and to provide analogue and digital output to different devices. A number of different Distributed Processing Units are available to meet specific control and monitoring applications. Remote Operator Stations: Their main functions are to receive alarms and to allow monitoring and control of the system. They can display mimic diagrams, allow control of the Watch Calling System and printing of various logs. They also enable the operator access to Distributed Processing Units for inspection of variables, local operation of equipment adjustment of parameters etc. Local Operator Stations: Their main functions are to enable the operator local access to Distributed Processing Units for inspection of variables, local operation of equipment adjustment of parameters etc. Watch Bridge Units: Their main functions are to indicate engine room alarms on the bridge while in bridge control and to accept the transfer of machine watch responsibility to and from the bridge. Watch Cabin Units: Their main functions are to indicate engine room alarms in the engineer on dutys cabin and in the public quarters while in bridge control.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Dual redundant Local Area Network: Used communication between the Remote Operator Stations other PC based equipment. Each unit is connected to completely separate Local Area Networks (LAN) maximum redundancy.
for and two for
Dual redundant CAN-bus: Used for communication between the Distributed Processing Units. Each unit is connected to two completely separate CAN-buses (CAN - Control Area Network) for maximum redundancy. Dual Process Segment Controller: The dPSC is a dual two channel CAN gateway. In most cases the two channels are working in parallel on redundant CAN lines. The main functions are to process messages from the a local CAN-bus segment and send them on the global process bus, where they are available for other dPSCs and System Gateways. Process Segment Starcoupler: Used to segment the CAN-bus so that a short circuit or broken line in one segment will not affect the functions in the other segments. System Gateway: Connects two CAN lines to two Local Area Network lines. The main purpose is to receive messages from the two process buses running CAN, and update the Remote Operator Station database. Different selections of these units are used to configure each C20 is a fully individual system. DataChief microprocessor-based system. It is decentralised for safety and ease of installation but operation is centralised using Remote Operator Stations (ROS). Each or a group of Distributed Processing Units can be connected to a Local Operator Station (LOS) containing display and keyboard for back-up/local operation.
1.3.3
Decentralised system architecture
The heart of the system is a small family of different intelligent I/O units called Distributed Processing Units. These communicate with each other on a redundant high capacity process-bus. All monitoring and automation functions are carried out by the Distributed Processing Units, while the centralised Remote Operator Stations provide the Human Machine Interface. Each Distributed Processing Unit type has a specific capacity in number and type of analogue or digital input and output channels. The number of channels varies from 8 to 32.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
To configure the tasks for a specific Distributed Processing Unit the appropriate software and parameters are downloaded into the unit. This allows some Distributed Processing Units to perform alarm functions, some control functions, some safety, or any combination of these. This makes it easy to separate automation system functions. The process-bus used for communication between the Distributed Processing Units in the DataChief C20 is the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. The CAN-bus has a very high reliability. For systems with a high number of Distributed Processing Units or for other design reasons, System Gateways (SGW) may be added to the CAN network. These units provide the necessary segregation of the automation system between for instance the different sections of an alarm and monitoring system. The System Gateways do not lower system performance or limit the possibilities for locating operator stations. The DataChief C20 is designed to accept both a grounded or a floating earth installation. The latter installation method is required by SOLAS Regulation 45 for some vessels types. Floating earth allows coexistence with other systems, and ground leakage detection.
ACCOMODATION
Fleetmaster
WHEELHOUSE
ROS ROS ROS 300 KW ROS
ENGINE CONTROL ROOM

ROS ROS
21
BUZZER WCU
WBU
WCU
PRINTER
PRINTER
PRINTER
WCU
DUAL LAN
HUB HUB
WCU VA C VA C VA C 24 V
WCU 1 - nn DPU M GE UPS 220 VAC 1- nn DPU INSTR.DRIV. M GE UPS 220 VAC M GE UPS 220 VAC UPS 24 VDC
DUAL CAN
START
INSTR.DRIV.
DUAL CAN
DPU ROT. LIGHT/ KLAXON RESET
PROCESS AREA
dPSC Gateway
RESET DPU RESET DPU DPU RESET DPU DPU RESET DPU DPU RESET DPU 1 x 8 DPU CABINET
LOS dPSC DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU 18 x 8 DPU CABINET W /dPSC DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU
LOS DPU DPU
LOS dPSC DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU W/dPSC DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU 1 x 8 DPU CABINET
LOS dPSC DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU 1 x 8 DPU CABINET W/dPSC DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU
LOS DPU DPU
LOS dPSC DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU 8 x 16 DPU CABINET DPU W/dPSC DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU
BUZZER
2 x 16 DPU CABINET 7 x 16 DPU CABINET
1 x 16 DPU CABINET
Figure 3 Typical configuration drawing for a passenger vessel.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
The Distributed Processing Units have been designed for immunity against single failures. Each Distributed Processing Unit has an internal three way galvanic isolation between power, communication and input/output channels. If a unit fails this will not affect the power source, communication bus or damage the sensors. The Built In System Test will detect the error and warn the operator. Failures to the process-bus, cabling or connected sensors will also be detected by the Built In System Test. Exchange of a faulty Distributed Processing Unit can be done without turning the power off the DataChief C20. The procedure is simply to disconnect and remove the faulty unit and then mount and connect a replacement. The operator then requests the system to replace the module, software is automatically downloaded and the Distributed Processing Unit starts operating. All Distributed Processing Unit types have been qualified according to the latest revision of the IACS E10 test procedure, satisfying the requirements for placement in the most demanding locations. All Distributed Processing Units can be mounted directly on diesel engines or similar locations without shock absorbers. Only Ingress Protection (IP) may be needed. The Distributed Processing Units are CE marked as required for some European Union flagstate vessels. They also meet the requirements to use the Wheel Mark defined by the European Union Maritime Directive (EMD), satisfying all the new Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements.
1.3.4
Centralised operation
DataChief C20 is operated through a number of Remote Operator Stations. These are normally located in the Engine Control Room. Additional stations may be located in the wheelhouse, cargo control room, damage control room, ships office or other parts of the vessel. The Remote Operator Stations are normally connected to the Distributed Processing Units trough a Dual Redundant Control Area Network. The Remote Operator Stations are fitted with colour graphic displays and are operated either using a standard PC keyboard and mouse or through a purpose built Operator Control Panel. The Remote Operator Stations provides the operator with a number of standard display pictures containing information about the engine and surrounding equipment. Control of any of the Distributed Processing Units can be performed from the Remote Operator Stations. Full monitoring and alarm facilities are provided in both machinery space and Engine Control Room.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Advanced facilities can also be provided for unmanned machinery space, and the watch-calling system allows automatic calling of duty engineers. This allows both machinery space and engine control room to be safely left unmanned, while the machinery watch is carried out from the bridge. All Remote Operator Stations are Windows based personal computers; type approved for maritime use. They work in parallel; none of them acts as master. All are interconnected via dual redundant local area network. Although every Remote Operator Station is identical, access to vital functions may be configured differently. The control availability is defined by extensive use of software password access. Some Remote Operator Stations such as units located in the ship office are normally used for monitoring only. These units will not allow acknowledgement of alarms or execution of control commands. All general information such as monitoring of alarms, trends and graphics are available for inspection. Changing a limit or parameter on one Remote Operator Station will automatically update all other stations. All operator actions such as the starting or stopping of a pump or the changing of an alarm limit are logged and time tagged (optional). When ever a variable or state changes significantly the Distributed Processing Units updates the database in each of the Remote Operator Stations. This means that data displayed at any Remote Operator Station is always up-to-date. There is no need to request data each time the operator wishes to inspect a variable. As a result of this, the data traffic on the process bus and the Local Area Network is kept to a minimum, giving extremely fast data access. The Remote Operator Station serves as the database host for process data, engineering data and software. Software for Remote Operator Stations and the different Distributed Processing Units are stored here. They include functions for automatic down loading of parameters to the Distributed Processing Units at commissioning time or when a Distributed Processing Unit is replaced. Configuration control of DataChief C20 systems is taken care of by an automatic version update at any change of the engineering database or the application software. The system logs all changes made. Version numbers and additional information can at any time be individually inspected for each DataChief C20, as required by the major classification societies. Our commissioning editor Tools is used to configure or modify the functionality of the DataChief C20 and is used to generate as built documentation.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
The local area network included as part of DataChief C20 can interface with personal computers for remote monitoring and even with other external computer systems. The following drawings gives a configuration example:
ACCOMODATION CHIEF ENGINEER ROOM
Fleetm aster
WHEELHOUSE
ENGINE CONTROL ROOM

ROS 300 KW
21
BUZZER WCU WCU 16 group
WBU LOS
PRINTER WCU 16 group WCU 16 group
WCU 16 group
WCU 16 group 1 - nn WCU 16 group DPU INSTR.DRIV. WCU 16 group WCU 16 group 1- nn DPU INSTR.DRIV. MGE UPS 220 VAC UPS 24 VDC UPS 24 VDC VA C 24 V 24 V
DUAL CAN
START
DPU ROT. LIGHT/ KLAXON
PROCESS AREA
DPU RESET DPU DPU RESET N x 3 DPU CABINET
DPU DPU DPU N x 3 DPU CABINET
DPU DPU DPU N x 3 DPU CABINET
DPU DPU DPU DPU N x 4 DPU CABINET
RESET
RESET
BUZZER
Figure 4 Configuration drawing for an oil tanker.
10
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.4
System components
The following pages contains a description of each of the main system components of the DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management. The following system components are described: - Remote operator station - Local Operator Stations - Watch Bridge Unit - Watch Cabin Unit - Distributed Processing Units - Gateways
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
11
1.4.1
Remote Operator Station
Figure 5 Remote Operator Station (ROS) The Remote Operator Station is a type approved personal computer, connected to a colour graphics display and a printer. Operator input is either done through a standard personal computer keyboard or through our custom made Operator Control Panel. The Operator Control Panel is a specially designed keyboard that provides easy access to the different operator functions. It is divided into separate function areas. Buttons are combined with lamps to indicate alarms, status of the Extended Alarm System and to indicate main system functions. The Operator Control Panel is in many cases connected to an external sound off button. The Remote Operator Station can be supplied with a printer (for on demand printing), an alarm printer, log printer or colour hard copy unit. When a Distributed Process Unit detects an alarm condition, the alarm is identified by a flashing indicator on the Operator Control Panel. The alarm is also displayed on the colour graphics display, a buzzer is turned on and the Alarm Printer automatically prints the alarm. By pressing the button associated with the flashing indicator more detailed alarm information is displayed on the colour graphics display.
12
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Detailed sensor information for any Distributed Process Unit, such as alarm or normal status data, can also be shown on the colour graphics display, or printed on demand. Analogue sensor data can be presented as a bargraph or a trend curve. Selected sensor data may be printed automatically at fixed intervals. The system can display the latest alarms for each alarm group individually or all active alarms. The logging printer and the colour graphics display records all status changes, such as alarm acknowledgements and alarm condition cleared. When all alarm conditions are cleared, the system returns to normal. Alarm limits and delays are adjustable from the Operator Control Panel. A counter function keeps track of running hours for engines, pumps and related items. This function can also accumulate flow. Counter values are shown on the colour graphics display or may be printed. The Remote Operator Station is used when transferring machinery watch responsibility between bridge and engine control room. Selecting the engineer for watch-call duty is carried out from here, and all available engineers, whether on duty or not, may be called to the engine control room in the case of an emergency.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
13
1.4.2
Midi operator station
Figure 6 Midi Operator Station (MOS). The Midi Operator Station is a multipurpose operator station designed to be placed anywhere on the ship, even out on deck. It allows alarm indication, process control and power management. Operation is performed through a set of function keys and a high resolution colour graphical display. For small alarm systems it can be the only operator station. The Midi Operator Station contains a symbol library for presentation of process control equipment and use these to display mimic diagrams. The Midi Operator Station gives the operator the possibility to: Monitor the status of any object, from a single input signal to a controllable object. Be informed of any process- or system alarm, through visual and audible signals. Interface to a printer for alarm loging purposes. Control the process through built-in pushbuttons and graphical feedback. Reconfigure the distributed database located in the Distributed Processing Units, through numeric and alphanumeric inputs.
14
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.4.3
Local operator station
Figure 7 Local Operator Station (LOS). The Local Operator Station is an optional operator control panel. It includes a four line by 40 characters Liquid Crystal Display (LCD display) and push-buttons for operator interaction. It is used to allow local access to the Distributed Processing Units for inspection of process variables, local operation of equipment, simulation of input/output signals, adjustment of parameters and inspection of the built-in diagnostics. All Distributed Processing Units connected to the same CAN-bus as the Local Operator Station are accessible. As soon as connection is established, the Local Operator Station is able to control the selected Distributed Processing Unit. The dialogues are defined by the functionality of each individual type of Distributed Processing Unit. If a Distributed Processing Unit is isolated from the rest of the system because of a communication break-down, or because the Remote Operator Station has developed a serious fault, all the necessary alarm and monitoring functions can as an option be available locally. Detailed information on the type of alarm and its source is then available at the Local Operator Station.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
15
1.4.4
Watch Bridge Unit
Figure 8 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU), LCD type. Two different types of Watch Bridge Units exist, an LED and a LCD type. Both are used to indicate and accept the transfer of machine watch responsibility between bridge and engine control room. The LED type has more alarm indicators and the LCD type has a display to show alarms in clear text.
Figure 9 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU), LED type.
16
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
When the bridge has the machinery watch responsibility, one or more engineers must be on call. A general alarm signal will call them to the engine control room if an alarm condition arises. The alarm indication on the Watch Bridge Unit is that a buzzer sounds and a single or group alarm lamp is flashing. When an alarm is acknowledged in the engine control room, or the situation is cleared, appropriate indications are given on the Watch Bridge Unit. The DataChief C20 prevents the bridge from assuming watch responsibility if no engineers are assigned to on call duty. The bridge personnel may call the engineers on-duty in their quarters at any time, for consultation etc. Acknowledgement of such calls are provided. Alarm indication can be provided when the bridge is not having the machinery watch. Indicators show when an alarm has been acknowledged in the engine control room but the buzzer is not sounded.
1.4.5
Watch Cabin Unit
Figure 10 Watch Cabin Unit (WBU), LCD type. Two different types of Watch Cabin Units exist, an LED and a LCD version. Both are used to indicate engine room alarms. They are placed in the engineers cabins and in public areas. The LED type has more alarm indicators and the LCD type has a display to show alarms in clear text. To set the machinery watch responsibility system to bridge mode one or more engineers must be on call. When an alarm condition arise a general alarm signal is sounded in the duty engineers cabins and in the public areas. The visual alarm indication on the Watch Cabin Unit consists of single or group alarm lamps.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
17
Figure 11 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU), LED type. When the bridge has the machinery watch responsibility, one or more engineers must be on call. When an alarm situation occur the alarm signal will be given, both in the duty-engineers cabin and in the public areas. The visual alarm indication on the Watch Cabin Units are that a buzzer sounds and a single or group alarm lamp is flashing. The engineer will then normally go to the engine control room to find the cause of the alarm. When the alarm is acknowledged in the engine control room, or the situation is cleared, the alarm condition is cleared from the Watch Cabin Units. If the engineer does not acknowledge within a specified period of time, the alarm signal is repeated in the engineers quarters, and on the bridge, until it is acknowledged. The system can also be used to call an engineer to the bridge or the engine control room without an alarm condition. Alarm indication without sounding the buzzer is configurable when the Watch Calling System is in off-duty mode.
18
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.4.6
ShipViewer
ShipViewer is a software package that runs on a standard personal computer connected to the DataChief C20 local area network. The computer can be installed anywhere on the ship. It has similar viewing capabilities as those found in the Remote Operator Station, but no control functions. The following systems can be monitored through ShipViewer dependent on the system configuration: Engine monitoring and control system Power management system Fire system Tank system The system presents online data, mimic diagrams, logged data and allows convenient printing facilities. It is a useful tool to avoid misunderstanding and lack of information.
Functions
Presentation of logged ship data and mimic diagrams. Presentation of alarms. Presentation of alarm history. Status on open/closed valves, running/stopped equipment etc.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
19
1.4.7
General
Distributed Processing Units
A number of different Distributed Processing Units are available for different tasks. The main functions of the Distributed Processing Units are to monitor analogue or digital sensors and to provide analogue and digital output to different devices. All units have the same mechanical construction and are built using the same electronic design principles. The main characteristics of the Distributed Processing Units are:
Figure 12 Distributed Processing Units (DPU) LED indicators on the housing for Watch-dog, Run, General information, unit initialised and power polarity. Three-way isolation between: - I/O and power. - I/O and process-bus. - Power and process-bus. Single printed circuit board design. Easy service replacement without setting trimmers, dip switches, jumpers or sockets. No additional EMC protection required (only IP). Time synchronisation. Non-volatile memory. Remote alarms function. Dual CAN-bus interfaces. Software can be downloaded into the unit.
20
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Built In Self-Test (BIST) monitoring temperature, power and sensor excitation overload. All parameters are stored in each unit. Each unit is remotely configurable. No serviceable parts inside. All connections are plugable. Each Distributed Process Unit contains its own microprocessor. These are programmed for a number of different tasks such as detecting when a monitored signal move outside set limits. Unwanted alarms are inhibited during start-up and shut-down of the machinery. Status information is continuously monitored by the DataChief C20s Remote Operator Stations through the system network. When an unacceptable condition is detected, the Distributed Process Unit and DataChief C20 generates an alarm signal, identifies the responsible sensor, and provides information about the condition. The following gives a short description of each Distributed Processing Unit type:
Remote Analogue Input (RAi-16)
This unit has 16 analogue input channels. Each channel is selectable as voltage, current and resistance input in different ranges and has free technical units scaling. It also incorporates a 5-500Hz counter channel. The main features are: 16 analog or digital input channels. Scaled in technical units. 1 Counter 5 - 500 Hz. Limit check. Alarm and monitoring for all channels. Trend. Time stamp of alarms and events (0.001 seconds). Self checking. Sensor excitation power overload. CAN net status, error handling.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
21
Remote Analogue Input (RAi-10tc)
This unit has 10 analogue input channels. It is used for temperature measurements with Thermo Coupler (TC) elements of different type. It is particularly suited to monitor engine exhaust temperatures. A large variety of temperature elements can be connected, with ranges 50, 200, 0 to + 600_C. A Cold Junction Compensation function is included. If external compensation is needed, the use of external Thermo Coupler amplifiers and RAi-16 is recommended. The main features are: 10 thermo-coupler input channels. Scaled in technical units. Limit check. Alarm and monitoring for all channels. Trend. Time stamp of alarms and events. Self checking. Sensor excitation power overload. CAN net status, error handling.
Remote Digital Input (RDi-32 and RDi-32a)
These units have 32 digital input channels/dry contacts and includes LED status indicators. The main features are: 32 digital input channels with LED status indicators. Input dry contacts. Alarm and monitoring for all channels. Trend. Time stamp of alarms and events. Self checking. Sensor excitation power overload. CAN net status, error handling.
Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8)
This unit has 8 analogue output channels. Each channel is selectable for voltage or current output in different ranges and almost free technical units scaling. This module is suited to drive analogue indicators. By placing the module close to instruments long cables can be avoided. The main features are: 8 analog output channels.
22
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
10VDC / 20 mA. CAN net status, error handling.

Remote Digital Output (RDo-16)
This unit has 16 digital output channels and includes LED status indicators. The maximum output current for each channel is 3 Amperes (resistive load). Maximum voltage is 230 VAC. The main features are: 16 digital output channels with LED status indicator. The main features are: Change over, brake before make relay-contacts. Pulse on output. Pulse off output. CAN net status, error handling.
Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1)
The RIO-C1 is a highly flexible input/output Distributed Processing Unit. It is particularly suited for electric generator control, main engine or auxiliary engine safety systems. The unit is equipped with four input channels, which can be individually configured to handle both analogue and digital signals. Each channel has an electronic fuse to protect the electronics against damage. The unit can connect to single-phase AC voltage and a current signal. Based on these signals the following values can be measured and calculated: AC voltage available from generator and busbar. AC current supplied from the generator. AC frequency of generator and busbar. Phase angle between AC voltages, for synchronising circuit breakers. Phase angle between AC voltage and current, for calculating reactive load, kVAr. Active load calculation based on AC voltage, current and phase angle. The unit can be connected to dual pick-ups, measuring rotating speed of any machinery, in the speed range of 0 1500 Hz. The two analogue output channels can drive any indicator by either voltage or current. The unit can further control six digital output channels (2-pole relay (normal open/normal closed) or solenoid valve driver with built-in loop fail detection facilities.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
23
Number of channels 6 2 2 1 4 2 4
Function Digital output Analogue output Analogue input. ACV (1--phase) Analogue input. AC current Analogue/digital input, flexible Input from pickup Digital input
Level Solenoid valve driver or relay, max 3 A resistive load mA Max. 30Vrms, 50/60 Hz Max. 1A, 50/60 Hz As RAi--16 24VDC (counter input) As RDI-32
Table 1 RIO-C1 Process connections. The main features are: 21 analog or digital, input and output channels with LED status indicator. Alarm and monitoring for all channels. Trend. Time stamp of alarms and events. Self checking. Sensor excitation power overload. CAN net status, error handling.
Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2)
The RIO-C2 is a combination module for digital inputs and outputs. The unit is equipped with eight digital input channels which are galvanically isolated between the sensor signals. The digital input sensor can be either a potential free contact (switch) or an external 24VDC or 24VAC signal. Each channel has an electronic fuse to protect the electronics against damage. When the faulty sensor interface has returned to normal, the electronic fuse is automatically reset. The unit can control eight digital output channels, 2-pole relays (normal open/normal closed). It is particularly suited for control of pumps and valves. The main features are: 8 input and 8 output channels with LED status indicator. - 8 channels relays change over, brake before make. - 8 channels digital inputs, with possibility for 24VDC live input or dry contacts.
24
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Alarm and monitoring for all channels. Trend. Time stamp of alarms and events. Self checking. Sensor excitation power overload. CAN net status, error handling.
Process Segment Starcoupler
The CAN line is vulnerable against short circuit and unterminated lines. A short-circuit or a broken line will disable the entire CAN segment. The Process Segment Starcoupler protects two sections of a CAN segment from each other. Each terminal on the Process Segment Starcoupler is based on the ISO 11898 standard, with optical isolation. The Process Segment Starcoupler also protects the terminals against dominant bits that are not part of a CAN message. Thus short-circuit or malfunction on one CAN terminal does not affect the other CAN terminals. The maximum length of one CAN segment at 125kBaud is 530m. A segment going through a Process Star Coupler is limited to 515m. This length is the maximum line length between any two nodes in the CAN segment. For that reason it is advised to use the Process Segment Starcoupler to split two sections of a process segment, where the segment is running through rough environment or fire zones.
Voltage converter controller (VCC)
The VCC-440 module is designed for use in main switchboards. The module secures the installation of the power management and generator protection system, by transforming the higher voltages to low and safe levels. The VCC-440 module is equipped with six voltage transformers to transform from 440 to 24 VAC. The module handles three major tasks: Supply the C3 generator protection module with AC voltage from the measured three phase generator bus bars, L1-L2, L1-L3 and L2-L3, derated from 440 to 24 VAC. Supply the C3 generator protection module with 24VDC power (1A), using the generator busbar (L2-L3) as source. Supply the C4 power management module with a single phase AC voltage from the generator busbar L1-L2 and the switchboard busbar L1-L2, derated from 440 to 24 VAC. As an option, the VCC module can be equipped with transformers for 690 VAC.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
25
Generator monitoring and control (C4)
The C4 module is designed for control of marine generators and bustie breakers. The in- and outputs are designed for interfacing to voltage and current transformers, as well as switchboard equipment. Synchronize and connect of generator CB. Synchronize and connect of bustie CB. Start and stop of auxiliary diesel engine. RPM set point control of auxiliary diesel engine. Optional control of primer pump for AE. Optional control of fuel selection for AE. Calculation of generator load (kW, kVAr). Driving MSB instruments (kW, kVAr). Load sharing between generators. AVR set point control (optional).
Generator protection (C3)
The C3 module is designed for protection of marine generators. The in- and outputs are designed for interfacing to voltage and current transformers as well as switchboard equipment. The module has a 7-segment display trip indicator, to be independent of external indicators. The C3 module is available in two versions: C3-GP: Generator Protection C3-GDCP: Generator & differential current protection The module has a dual 24VDC power connection, to uniterruptible power supply and generator voltage. Short circuit tripping of generator CB. Over current tripping of generator CB. Reverse power tripping of generator CB. Optional differential current protection. Local indication of reason for trip. Local reset of tripping. Calculation of generator load (kW, kVAr). Calculation of phase angel between voltage and current (cosine ).
1.4.8
General
Gateways
Two types of gateways are available.
26
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
The System Gateway: Used as a redundant gateway between CAN-bus and Local Area Network. The dual Processing System Controller: Used as a redundant gateway between two CAN segments (sections of the CAN-bus). The main purposes of both units are to provide galvanic isolation between different parts of the network and to segregate process bus traffic in large systems. Messages are then converted between the network parts, while maintaining redundancy. Both units provide a service to protect all nodes (Distributed Processing Units, Watch Bridge Unit, Watch Cabin Units and Local Operator panels) connected to the CAN-bus. If the communication with one node fails, the gateways will generate a system failure message identifying the node and the failure. The Dual Process System Controller may also be equipped with supervisory control logic for particularly demanding tasks.
The System Gateway SGW
The System Gateway is a four channel CAN-bus to dual Local Area Network gateway. Its main task is to receive messages from the two CAN-buses, and update the Remote Operator Stations. Handling of operator commands and downloading of parameters and software from the Remote Operator Stations to the nodes (Distributed Processing Units and Local Operator Stations) are handled as well. The System Gateway will route global CAN-bus messages between the four CAN-buses. Global messages are data messages needed in more than one bus segment, typically messages for inhibiting or blocking alarms during start-up or shut-down. The System Gateway functions as an intelligent message converter sending and receiving data between any of its CAN channels and units having Process Data Segment located on the Local Area Network. The converter function will pre-process CAN messages and load them into a local database for distribution. The other way the converter will convert messages from Process Data Segment and route them to the relevant node (Distributed Processing Units, or Local Operator panels). All necessary configuration and software installation is done through the Local Area Network. The Simple Network Management Protocol is implemented to gain access via the Local Area Network to System Gateway and CAN diagnostic databases. Galvanic isolation is provided between the 24V power input and the System Gateway interfaces.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
27
Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC)
The dual Process Segment Controller is a dual two channel CAN gateway. It consist of two processors, each with two CAN interfaces. The two processors have separate power connections, and they share information via dual port memory. In this way the two processors are able to run in parallel and provide redundancy both for CAN-bus communication and for logic functions. The main function is to process messages from the local CAN-bus segment and send them on the global CAN bus, where they are available for other dual Process Segment Controllers and System Gateways. It handles operator commands and downloading of parameters and software from any System Gateway or Remote Operator Station to the Distributed Processing Units connected to the local CAN-bus. When the dual Process Segment Controller is controlling a set of Distributed Processing Units, both processors are working in parallel running the same process algorithm. In this function the dual Process Segment Controller operate as a running back-up. The dual Process Segment Controller is equipped with a dual serial interface (RS422/485), primarily designated to communicate with other manufacturers equipment. Galvanic isolation is provided between the power connections and the CAN-bus, and between the two CAN-buses. The main features are: Dual two channel CAN gateway with separate and galvanic isolated processors. Possible to power the two processors from separate power supplies. High speed data-link between the two processors. A node with CANopen master capability on all four CAN channels. Redundant routing of messages between local and global CAN segments. Dual serial interface, galvanic isolated, RS422/485 to communicate with other vendors equipment. Various redundant application process control logic. When the two processors in the dual Process Segment Controller is controlling the same Distributed Processing Units they are working in parallel running the same process algorithm.
28
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.5
Software components
1.5.1 Humane Machine Interface
Operator control panel
The Operator Control Panel is either available as a dedicated panel or displayed and operated from the colour graphics display using a standard PC keyboard and mouse. The Operator Control Panel include the following main functions: Alarm display selection and acknowledgement. Selection and set-up of information to be monitored. Set-up and activation of logging (printing). Parameter adjustment. Extended Alarm and watch-calling functions. When only monitoring facilities are required the panels control functions can be inhibited.
Figure 13 Remote Operator Stations.

Alarm and monitoring display
A number of display windows are available for presenting alarms and monitored values. Alarm windows include: Alarm group display (activated by the group alarm push-buttons). Alarm summary, containing a list of all active alarms messages. Alarm history, containing a continuous list of time-stamped alarm messages.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
29
Monitoring windows include: Group display containing a list of all measuring points within an alarm group. Information display for a selected point. Tag details giving detailed information about each measuring point in the system.
Process mimics, bargraphs & status displays
The system can include (as an option) a number of standard display pictures for common information from the engine and surrounding equipment. The standard mimic windows are: Exhaust gas temperatures and average temperature bar graph. Bar graphs. Trend curves. In addition, customised mimic diagrams will be designed for each project according to the piping diagrams. These display windows show the status of the equipment (open/closed, running/stopped, % filling etc.) and are interactive, allowing operation of the equipment.
Logging/hard copy
All logs can be printed on request. The autolog and the selected points log can also be configured to print at specified intervals. The following logging function are available: Alarm log (time stamped alarm and return to normal). Selected points log. Complete log. Group log. Inhibited points log. Autolog. All alarms are printed in red. A separate deskjet printer can be fitted to print mimic display windows as an option.
Self-checking and diagnostics
The Distributed Processing Units have an on-line Built In Self-Test (BIST) system, that monitors the units temperature, power, and sensor excitation. Testing of the Remote Operator Stations and their ability to give alarms according to the requirements, is initiated by pushing the alarm test push-button on the Operator Control Panel. In addition, the electronics is automatically tested when power is turned on.
30
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Access control
In order to limit or enable control of the process from any Remote Operator Station an advanced passwords system is available . Changes of limits or parameters are also guarded through the use of passwords. All operator actions can be logged with time tags (optional).
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
31
1.5.2
System functions
Alarm block
Some of the alarms are conditional and will be blocked when a specified condition is present. For instance when the main engine is stopped the lubrication oil pressure falls and should normally have triggered an alarm condition. Since this is quite normal the alarm is blocked. This function is started by defining a signal as an inhibit signal for a specified alarm or a specified group of alarms. An adjustable time delay for each signal is available to extend the blocking situation.
Alarm acknowledge
It is possible to acknowledge alarms while a mimic window, alarm group or alarm summary is displayed. Alarm acknowledgement for separate or group alarms displayed on the screen is done through a single push of the same pushbutton.
Engine exhaust gas temperature monitoring
The DataChief C20 exhaust gas monitoring system calculates the deviation between the individual cylinders and the average value of all cylinders. An alarm is given if the deviation exceeds the acceptable limit. Alarm limits are continuously calculated based on the engine load. The deadband is set narrower as the engine load increases. Individual variations due to different exhaust piping and sensor locations for each cylinder are taken into account. Individual calculations for each cylinder bank are when relevant made. The maximum number of cylinder for each engine or cylinder bank is 12. As the average temperature is used as reference for the deviations, it is necessary to correct the temperature of each cylinder, to get the same temperature in all cylinders as reference. This correction is done when running the engine at full load. When the average temperature is below a preset value, the deviation alarm is blocked.
Trend monitor
The DataChief C20 automatically records selected measurements, and store them for use in the trend monitoring system. This system can present recorded data for all variables as curves. The trend monitor is part of the Remote Operator Station. Two functions are available; Select Trend and Display Trend. The Select Trend function assigns the display of trend curves to specified variables. The operator can specify five different trend displays with eight variables each, giving a total of forty recorded variables display.
32
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
The Display Trend function displays the selected trend as continuous curves. The present value is at the right hand side of the display window while the previous values are displayed towards the left. Each curve has an assigned colour. The trend display gives tag name, tag description and the numerical actual value of eight variables at a time.
Fuel performance system (optional)
The fuel economising system is a tool to monitor fuel consumption and assess the efficiency of the propulsion machinery. To study performance parameters momentary values are available. Accumulated fuel consumption and propeller shaft power such as for a voyage can be displayed and printed for reporting. Calculations are based on the Distributed Processing Units making continuous measurements. The following sensor data are required: Fuel oil flow for each propulsion engine. Both input and output flow must be measured. Fuel oil temperature for all input and output flows. Running signal for each propulsion engine. Shaft power (torque) for each propeller shaft. Ship speed. Based on these measurements the following performance parameters are calculated: Momentary fuel consumption for each engine in kg/hrs. Total momentary fuel consumption in kg/hrs. Hull efficiency in kg/nm. Engine efficiency for each engine in g/kWh. Shaft power for each shaft in MW. Total shaft power in MW. Fuel consumption and power output is calculated over the voyage period. Accumulated data includes: Duration of voyage in hours. Distance travelled in nautical miles. Accumulated fuel consumption for each main engine in tons. Total accumulated fuel consumption in tons. Accumulated propeller shaft power in for each shaft in MWh. Total accumulated propeller shaft power in MWh
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
33
Accumulated values can be reset by the operator. When doing so, the accumulated values are printed (a post voyage report). All fuel economising measurements and calculations are available as a display window on any of the Remote Operator Stations.
Running hours & counters
To improve the maintenance plan and to decide which components needs overhauling, it is important to know the running hours for each component. The DataChief C20 running hours function keeps track of the running hours for selected pumps, fans, compressors, purifiers & generators etc., and present the result to the operator on demand. Any status signal interfaced to the DataChief C20 can be used to count running hours. Two separate counter functions are available: Counter for total active running hour. Lap counter. A table containing all parameters and their running hour values can be printed on demand. Values can be manually reset when units have been overhauled. When required, adjustments can be made to the total running hour or lap counter for any unit.
34
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.5.3
Process control functions
All data acquisition, signal conditioning, signal scaling and process control is performed by each individual Distributed Processing Unit. This solution guarantees that local operation is available even if the Remote Operator Stations are not functioning.
Stand by pumps General
Pump control is located in the Distributed Processing Units. Remote control is available from the Remote Operator Stations in two ways: Through the stand by pump mimic diagrams. Through a mimic diagram included in the monitoring and control system.
Stand by start at low pressure
When the pressure drops below the set limit the stand by pump automatically starts. The limit may be adjusted if an analogue sensor is used.
Inhibit stand by start
Starting of the stand by pump is blocked after a blackout or at a group start, until the pressure has built up. The stand by logic can also be inhibited by an external condition, such as main engine stopped, aux engine stopped or a similar condition.
Restart after blackout
Some units have to be automatically restarted after a blackout. These units are included in a start sequence. The delay time defined in the Distributed Processing Units pump logic determines the start sequence. The operator can adjust the sequence timing.
Group start of pumps
Remote controlled pumps can be started in sequence.

Alarms from the stand by pump logic
Stand by start alarm. Auto start fail or trip. Non stand by alarm (indicates that a stopped pump is no longer in stand by mode). Sensors: Pressure switches or analogue sensors may be used for the control functions. Limits: All limits are downloaded from the remote Operator Station as part of its database. Limits may be adjusted from Remote Operator Station or at the Local Operator Station.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
35
Configuration: To maintain redundancy in a two or three pump system, the signals from the motor starters and the process are normally routed to different Distributed Processing Units. This configuration allows the system to work even if one of the Distributed Processing Unit fails. The stand by pump logic is also active when the Remote Operator Station is down.
Valve control General
Valve control is located in the Distributed Processing Units. Remote control is available from the Remote Operator Stations through mimic diagrams.
Valve Types
Single Acting Valve: This valve type is controlled by one digital output signal. The valve-position (closed or open) is given by the signals by one or two limit switches. Double-Acting Valve: This valve type is controlled by two digital output and two input signals. The valve is opened or closed by pulsing a relay. Double-Acting Valve with Position Control: This valve type is controlled by two digital outputs; two digital inputs and an analog input signal. The valve position is set within a defined dead band by pulsing a relay.
Additional functions
In addition, the following functions are available as part of the valve control system. Pulsed output. Automatic closing of a set of valves. Automatic opening or closing of valves. Close on an analog setpoint, using deadband. Low-level Auto CLOSE Valve, remote OPEN/CLOSE function. Close when a low level switch opens. Automatic OPEN/CLOSE of Valve Remote OPEN/CLOSE function. Close when a low level switch opens. Valve Change-Over on Alarm with Reset.
PID controllers
The PID controller system is a set of software modules located in the appropriate Distributed Processing Units. All combinations of PID controllers are available. Cascade control is accomplished by connecting two controllers together. The PID controllers can be configured from the Local or Remote Operator Station. The following parameters are available:
36
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Tuning parameters (gain, integration time and derivation time). Controller setpoint. Output mode (true control mode, AUTO, or valve position control mode, SEMIAUTO). Controller types (P, PI, PD or PID). Selection of input and output signal type. Input and output channel number. Sampling time.
Compressor control
The compressor control system is a set of software modules located in the appropriate Distributed Processing Units. The main purpose is to maintain the air receiver pressure at a constant value. This function includes remote manual and automatic start and stop of compressors, restart after blackout and automatic drain control. The compressor control system communicates with the Local or Remote Operator Station and can be monitored or controlled from here.
Purifier control
The purifier control system is a set of software modules located in the appropriate Distributed Processing Units. The purifier control program is specially written to operate Alfa Lavals self cleaning oil purifiers, and includes operation of the following equipment: Crude oil booster pump (optional). Crude oil temperature controller. Purifiers. Sealing valves. Discharge valves. The equipment may be controlled from the Remote or Local Operator Station. Purifier configuration is selected manually by operating different by-pass valves directly. The purifier control program will sense if purifiers are running in series or parallel. Mode of operation is indicated in the mimic display by showing the oil path as green lines. Purifier no.1 will always run as purifier, whereas purifier no.2 may be selected to run as purifier or clarifier.
Boiler control
The boiler control system is a set of software modules located the appropriate Distributed Processing Units. These The program consists of a standard PID controller and is adaptable to different types of boilers. The boiler control system uses fail checking extensively, and employs a program for controlled shut down, and provides visible alarms.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
37
Boiler system parameters are available on the Local or Remote Operator Station. All parameters are found in the steam system mimic display. System information such as alarms and analogue values are part of the normal DataChief C20 alarm and monitoring system. The boiler control involves total control of the following equipment: Fuel oil standby pumps. Burner motor. Fuel pre heater. Nozzles. Ignition unit. Air damper. Steam release valve. These units are connected to and controlled by the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit.
38
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.5.4
Introduction
The power management system controls the power generation and distribution on board the vessel. It includes all the automatic functions necessary for safe and economic operation of the power plant. The basic system consists of one Distributed Processing Unit per connected genearator unit. Each perform the power management functions of the connected generator unit. The system is suitable for electrical generators driven by a diesel engine, a steam turbine or by the propeller shaft. The Distributed Processing Units have different configurations and control strategies depending on the type of drive. The Distributed Processing Units are connected to Remote Operator Station (Remote Operator Station) which allows the operator to initiate the same monitoring and control functions that can be performed locally. For complex Power management Systems an additional Distributed Processing Unit, the dPSC, is used for mode control etc. This is a unit giving redundancy both in function and communication, and allows separation of local PMS CAN processbus data traffic from other the global CAN-network of the DataChief C20 system. The power management system will be adapted to the specific configuration of power generators and bus bars on the ship. In order to comply with the latest rules of separation of functions for alarm, control and safety, these functions have been addressed to separate Distributed Processing Units like this: Complex logic: A Dual Process Segment Gateway (when needed). PMS control logic: A Distributed Processing Unit RiO C1 for each generator. Diesel generator Safety system: A separate Distributed Processing Unit RiO C1. Bus-tie Control: A Distributed Processing Unit RiO C1 for each Bustie. Alarms: To Rai-16 or Rdi-32 Units. Note: These units interact on a dual redundant CAN-bus.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
39
Generator Control Functions Synchronizing
The power management system automatically selects and synchronizes generators to the net as required. A Distributed Processing Unit controls speed, deviation of voltage/frequency and breaker.
Frequency Control/Loadsharing
When automatic mode is selected, one of the Distributed Processing Units must be defined as Master. The Distributed Processing Unit designated as No.1 Stand-By will automatically be master if no other master selection is made. The bus bar frequency and voltage values from the main switchboard are available in all the Distributed Processing Units. The Master mode Distributed Processing Unit is the reference for frequency and voltage values. It maintains a constant bus frequency by controlling its engines speed. The Master mode Distributed Processing Unit controls the bus frequency while the stand-by Distributed Processing Units controls the load-sharing.
Asymmetric Loadsharing
The Distributed Processing Unit has an asymmetric or unbalanced load-sharing function that will force one generator to run at almost maximum load for a pre-defined period, while the second generator is operating at minimal load and fuel consumption. At the expiration of the defined period, the generators swap loads.
Symmetric Loadsharing
If two or more generators are running and asymmetric load-sharing has not been requested, the load is shared equally between the generators.
Load-dependent Start/Stop of the Stand-by Generators
Each stand-by Distributed Processing Unit will automatically start, synchronise and connect its generator according to its assigned order-of-priority and whenever it receives one of the following requests: Switch-on request from the heavy consumer(s) if the generators in operation cannot provide enough power. A start request from another Distributed Processing Unit when its operating generator has developed a fault, which prevents it from maintaining its share of the load. A start request from another Distributed Processing Unit when its operating generator is approaching the point of overload.
40
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
It is possible to override or block the low load auto-stop feature. Whenever blocked, the stand-by generator will keep on running, independent of the load parameters. This feature is especially useful when a heavy consumer (e.g. a ships bow thruster) is required to be started instantaneously at irregular intervals. Automatic Start-and-Connect After a Power Blackout.The power blackout logic is triggered when the power management system detects that all breakers are disconnected and that the line voltage is low. (<10% of normal). In a power blackout situation, all of the generators controlled by each stand-by Distributed Processing Unit will start and connect to the bus. Supervision of Heavy Consumer Switch-on Each Distributed Processing Unit is able to supervise the switch-on control heavy consumers to ensure that a switch-on will not cause a power blackout. If the demand for power exceeds the capacity of the operating generators, the power management system will start up and connect a stand-by generator to ensure that sufficient capacity is available before the request for switch-on is granted.
Power Management Functions with Shaft Generator
Main Functions One Distributed Processing Unit control the Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit, whereas other Distributed Processing Units control the bus tie breaker and the other auxiliary generators. The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit logic is adaptable to various switch board configuration. The following functions are available: Control of the shaft generator circuit breaker and the bus tie breaker with automatic synchronisation. Control of the connection and disconnection of bow- and stern thruster. Overall control of the Distributed Processing Units that control the auxiliary generator sets. Operational Modes/Mode Control The power management system allows many different modes of operation. The following standard modes are provided, an example with 1 SG, two DGs, two busties and a bowthruster: Harbour: Both DGs running. Both busties closed. This mode allows the bow thruster to be started. If load is low, and bowthruster not running the standby DG will automatically be disconnected and stopped. This is blocked if the thruster is running or the STOP BLOCK switch in the Diesel Generator Distributed Processing Unit is activated.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
41
At sea: The SG is running. Both busties closed. The bow thruster is blocked for starting. Both DGs are stopped and standby ready for start. Cargo handling: Bustie 2 is open. One or two DGs power consumers on port busbar. The shaft generator is powering heavy consumers on stand-by busbar. The bow thruster is blocked for starting. Manoeuvre: Bustie 1 is open. One or two DGs power consumers on port busbar. The shaft generator power the bow thruster only. Transition between these modes is possible in two ways: Mode control: Selection of one of the predefined operational mode, leading to a set of actions which the operator has to perform in order to put the Power Generating System into that mode. One-Touch Mode Control: Selection of one of the predefined operational mode, leading to a sequence of automatic events to put the Power Generating system into that mode. This one-touch control to be made from the Remote Operator Station. Always when changing mode from shaft generator powering the net to auxiliary generators powering the net or to split net operation, the Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit will give a start and connect command to at least two auxiliary generators. Upon reception of this command, the power management system will only start one diesel at a time.
Shaft Generator Overload
The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit will check for overload of the shaft generator. If overloaded for more than a predefined period of time, a request for split net is generated.
Shaft- And Auxiliary Generator In Parallel
There is an adjustable time limit for parallel load sharing between shaft- and auxiliary generators. The bus-tie will automatically be disconnected when parallel load sharing exceeds this time limit.
Shaft Generator Control Functions
The shaft generator is interfaced to the integrated control and alarm/monitoring system via the Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit. The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit has facilities for remote start and stop. A speed drop function versus load enable the shaft generator to be run in parallel with diesel generators. When the controller is set to remote operation mode, the following functions are available:
42
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Manual start from keyboard and mimic diagrams Manual stop from keyboard and mimic diagrams Automatic stop in case of alarms on main engine or the shaft generator itself Monitoring of critical parameters when the shaft generator is running. (Additional function to controller, with its own safety functions for the shaft generator) When the shaft generator is connected, the master Distributed Processing Unit will do loadsharing on the diesel generator in parallel with the shaft generator. The frequency on the busbar is a result of the ME speed. Parallel load sharing between shaft generator and diesel generators are limited in time, controlled from the Power Management System. The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit and the Distributed Processing Units perform the functions for the Power Management System completely independent of the Alarm- and Monitoring System.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
43
1.6
Technical specifications
1.6.1 Introduction
The following is a summary of the technical specifications for the DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management. Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems is engaged in continues development of its products and reserves the right to alter specifications without prior notice.
1.6.2
Operator Control Panel (OCP)
Supply voltage: 24 V DC, 5% ripple (Input filter included) Power consumption: 4 W Nom (12 W when lamp test activated). Ambient operational conditions: 0_C to + 70_C inside console. Maximum relative humidity: 97% non-condensing Ambient storage temperature: - 30_C to + 80_C Production burn-in: + 70_C for 72 hours Type approved by classification societies: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China). Cable connections: - Power terminal: 2.5 mm2 - Signal terminal: 2.5 mm2 Cable length to PC: 2,5 m. Weight of unit: 4 kg (cables and terminals 0.5 kg) Dimensions: W482.6 H265.8 D45 mm. Panel cut-out: W450 +1 H257 + 1 mm. Mounting: Flush mounting with screws or free standing in cabinet. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC): The Operator Control Panel complies with the classification society requirements regarding electrostatic discharge, radiated susceptibility and conducted susceptibility. In addition it is prepared to meet the EU directive valid from 1.1.96 regarding radiated emission and conducted emission.
1.6.3
Midi Operator Station (MOS)
Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC 5 % ripple.
44
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Power consumption: 10 W. Ambient operational temperature: -15_C to + 70_C Max. rel. Humidity: 96% non-condensing. Ambient storage temperature: 25C to +70C in a dry area with approx. 70% humidity. Display: TFT colour, 5.7, 320 x 240 pixels. Housing: Cast aluminium back, polycarbonate front. Weight of unit: 1.5 kg. Dimensions: W252 H144 B70 mm. Panel cut-out: 242 x 134 mm. Mounting: Bracket for table, ceiling and wall. Flush mount with removable corners. Shock and vibration: DnV Class B, IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors, etc.). EMC properties: According to IACS E10, IEC 60945.
1.6.4
Local Operator Station (LOS)
Supply voltage: 18 32 V DC Power consumption: 6 W Ambient operational temperature: 0_C to + 70_C Maximum relative humidity: 97% non-condensing Ambient storage temperature: - 30_C to + 80_C Weight of unit: 1.4 kg. Dimension: - Outline: W240 x H144 x D50 mm. - Cut out: W211 x H138 mm. Mounting: Screws (4 Pcs M4)
1.6.5
Watch Bridge Unit (WBU)
Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC Power consumption: 6 W Ambient operational temperature: 0_C to + 70_C Maximum relative humidity: 97% non-condensing Ambient storage temperature: - 30_C to + 80_C Weight of unit: 1.4 kg.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
45
Dimension: - Outline: W240 x H144 x D50 mm. - Cut out: W211 x H138 mm. Mounting: Screws (4 Pcs M4)
1.6.6

Watch Cabin Unit (WCU)
Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC Power consumption: 6 W Ambient operational temperature: 0_C to + 70_C Maximum relative humidity: 97% non-condensing Ambient storage temperature: - 30_C to + 80_C Weight of unit: 1.4 kg. Dimension: - Outline: W240 x H144 x D50 mm. - Cut out: W211 x H138 mm. Mounting: Screws (4 Pcs M4)
1.6.7
Remote Analogue Input (RAi-16)
Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC Power consumption: - Module Nominal 7,5W, Max. 10W - Current mode sensors add Nominal 9W, Max. 11 Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing Mechanical environment: - DnV Class B - IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.) EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945 Weight of unit: 2.0 kg. Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China) Specification: ISO per module in power port: 50 VDC continues 50 VAC 1 minute. Isolation: - Power Complete isolated: (DC/DC Converter) - I/O: No isolation between channels. Chassis used as 0 Volt reference. - CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).
46
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Signal types: - Input differential: CMV 10 [ V ] - Voltage Scaling: 0,1/1/5/10 [Volt] - Current Scaling: 1/5/10/20 [mA] - Technical units: Free range Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD): - Scaling: PT100, PT1000 [] - Range: PT1000 0-200C, 0-600 0-800C PT100 0-200C,
Accuracy: Voltage measurement A/D 0.002 % Accuracy w/signal conditioning: 0.4 % Sensor excitation voltage and current: 30-40 mA nominal. Fused at 100mA per channel or 350 ma for the whole module, with overload indicator. BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor excitation overload.
1.6.8
Remote Analogue Input (RAi-10tc)
Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC Power consumption: Nominal 7,5W, Max. 10W Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing Mechanical environment: - DnV Class B - IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.) EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945 Weight of unit: 1.6 kg. Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China) Specification: Input: Differential CMV 10[V]. ISO per module in power port: 50 VDC continues 50 VAC 1 minute. Isolation: - Power Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter) - I/O No isolation between channels. Chassis used as 0 Volt reference. - CAN Complete isolated (Opto coupler).
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
47
Signal types: - Thermocouples with Cold Junction compensation - According to IEC 584 - Element: R/S/J/E/N 0-200, 0-600C - Element: B 0-600C - Element: T 0-200C - Element: K 0-200, 0-600, 0-1200C - Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD) - Scaling PT100, PT1000 [] - Range PT1000 0-200C, 0-600 PT100 0-200C, 0-800C Accuracy: Voltage measurement A/D 0.002 % Accuracy w/signal conditioning: 0.5 %
1.6.9
Remote Digital Input (RDi-32 & RDi-32a)
Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC Power consumption: Nominal 8W Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C Maximum relative humidity: 96% non-condensing Mechanical environment: - DnV Class B - IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.) EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945 Weight of unit: 1.8 kg. Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China) Specification: ISO per module in power port: 50 VDC continues 50 VAC 1 minute. Isolation: RDi-32: - CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler). - Input: Supplied from 24V DC Main power - Power: Isolated from Module chassis - RDi-32a: - CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler). - Input: Isolated between channels (Opto coupler) - Power: Isolated from Module chassis
48
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Signal types: On/off Specification: - RDi-32: Dry contact - RDi-32a: Active signal 24VDC or AC (50-70 Hz) Sensor excitation voltage and current: only for RDi-32 6 mA @ 24VDC nominal. BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor excitation overload.
1.6.10 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8)

Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC Power consumption: Nominal 8.5W, Max. 10W Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C Maximum relative humidity: 96% non-condensing Mechanical environment: - DnV Class B - IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.) EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945 Weight of unit: 1.5 kg. Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China) Specification: ISO per module in power port: 50 VDC continues 50 VAC 1 minute. Isolation: - Power: Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter) - I/O: No isolation between channels. Chassis used as 0 Volt reference. - CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler). Signal types: - Voltage Scaling: 0,1/1/5/10[Volt] - Current Scaling: 1/5/10/20 [mA] - Technical units: Free range Accuracy: Voltage conversion D/A 0.1 % Accuracy w/signal conditioning: 0.4 % Resolution: 12 bit
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
49
Bandwidth: 10 [Hz] BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor excitation overload.
1.6.11 Remote Digital Output (RDo-16)

Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC Power consumption: Nominal 8.0W, Max. 10W Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing Mechanical environment: - DnV Class B - IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.) EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945 Weight of unit: 1.6 kg. Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China) Signal types: Digital Output Specification: All outputs max. 3 Amps 230V AC Relay: Resistive load 1 pole change over contact. Isolation: - Power: Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter) - Output: Isolation between channels (relays) - CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler). BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor excitation overload.
1.6.12 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1)

Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC Power consumption: Nominal 10.5W, Max. 12W Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing Mechanical environment: - DnV Class B - IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
50
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945 Weight of unit: 2 kg. Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China) Isolation: Ref.: Engineering Guide 656 BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor excitation overload. Digital output: - All outputs max. 3 Amps 250VAC (relay). Relay for resistive load 1 pole change over (NO/NC). Solid state for inductive load (solenoid driver in parallel) 24V DC. Analogue output: - Range: 22mA - Accuracy w/signal conditioning: 0.5 [%] Analogue input ACV (1-phase): - Input: Max. 30Vrms - Voltage Scaling: 30 [Volt] - Frequency scaling: 0-90 [Hz] - Technical units: Free range - Accuracy w/ signal conditioning: 1 [%] Analogue input IAC: - Input: Max 1A - Current scaling: 0-1A - Technical units: Free range - Accuracy w/signal conditioning: 1 [%] Input from pickup: - 24V DC (counter input): - 5 KHz Analogue/digital input, flexible: - For details, see separate data sheet for RAi-16. Digital Input: - For details, see separate data sheet for RDi-32. Derived calculated variables: KW active power KVAr reactive power COS Frequency

Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
51
Power consumption: Nominal 8W Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing Mechanical environment: - DnV Class B - IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.) EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945 Weight of unit: 1.8 kg. Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China) 2 ways isolation: - I/O Communication. - Power Communication. Digital output: - All outputs max. 3 Amps 230VAC - Relay: Resistive load 1 pole change over. Digital input: - Dry contact, high side or low side switch - Sensor excitation voltage and current: 6 mA @ 24VDC nominal. BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor excitation overload. Isolation: CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler) Input: Isolation between channels (Opto coupler) Output: Isolation between channels (relays) Power: Isolated from module chassis

Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC Power consumption: Nominal 15W Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing Mechanical environment: - Maximum 4g (allows direct mounting on engines, compressors, etc.)
52
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945 Weight of unit: 2.0 kg. Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China) 3 ways isolation: - I/O Communication. - Power Communication. - Power I/O Serial interfaces: 2 CAN ports for redundant communication interface (galvanic isolated). 4 Digital output: - All outputs max. 3 Amps 250VAC (relay). - 1 pole change over. Inductive load. 3 phase ACV input: - Input: Max. 35Vrms - Voltage scaling: 29 Volt - Frequency scaling: 0-90 Hz - Technical units: Free range - Accuracy: 1 % 3 phase IAC. Generator current (MSB): - Input: Max 15A - Current scaling: 0-5A - Over current scaling: 0-15A - Maximum readable input: 15A.max 0.5 s - Technical units: free range - Accuracy: 1 % - Over current: 5 % 3 phase IAC. generator current (internal): - Input: Maximum 15A - Current scaling: 0-5A - Maximum readable input: 5A - Maximum input: 15A.max 0.5 s - Technical units: Free range - Accuracy: 1 % 3 Digital Input: - Require dry contact or opto coupler.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
53
Trip display and reset switch: Local 7-segment display on module, reason for trip indication. Reset switch on module. BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor excitation overload.

Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC Power consumption: Nominal 15W Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing Mechanical environment: - Maximum 4g (allows direct mounting on engines, compressors, etc.) EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945 Weight of unit: 2.0 kg. Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China) 3 ways isolation: - I/O Communication. - Power Communication. - Power I/O 8 Digital output: - All outputs max. 3 Amps 250VAC (relay) - 1 pole change over. Inductive load. 2 ACV input (bus and generator): - Input: Max. 35Vrms - Voltage scaling: 29 Volt - Frequency scaling: 0-90 Hz - Technical units: Free range - Accuracy: 1 [%] 1 phase IAC. generator current input: Input: Max 15A Current scaling: 0-5A Maximum readable input: 5A. Maximum input: 15A.max 0.5 s Technical units: Free range Accuracy: 1 %
54
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
4 Digital inputs: - Require dry contact or opto coupler. 2 Analogue output: - Range: 22mA and 11V - Accuracy with signal conditioning: 1.0 % BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor excitation overload.
1.6.16 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC)

Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC Power consumption: 12 W Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing Mechanical environment: - Maximum 0.7g EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945 Weight of unit: 3.8 kg. Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China) Isolation: - Isolation between input terminal and ground: 2000VAC - Isolation between input terminals: 2000VAC 2 ACV output synchronisation: - 1 phase generator and 1 phase bus. - Range: 0-24VAC - Accuracy: 1.0 % 3 phase ACV output protection: - 3 phase generator. - Range: 0-24VAC - Accuracy: 1.0 % 1 DC output (Protection backup power): - Voltage: 24VDC - Maximum current: 1000mA - Accuracy: 5.0 %
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
55
BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensor excitation overload.
1.6.17 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS)

Supply voltage: 18-32 VDC Power Consumption: Nominal 4 W Max. 5 W Ambient operational temperature: 15_C to +70 _C Ambient storage temperature: -25_C to +70_C Maximum relative humidity: 96% non-condensing Mechanical environment: - DnV class B - IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.) EMC properties: According IACS E10, EN60945 Weight of module: 1 kg. Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China) Specification: Isolation power port: 50 VDC continuous 50 VAC 1 minute. Isolation: - Power: Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter) - CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler)
1.6.18 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC)

Supply voltage: 18-32 VDC Power Consumption: Nominal 12 W Max. 15 W Ambient operational temperature: 15_C to +70 _C Ambient storage temperature: -25_C to +70_C Maximum relative humidity: 96% non-condensing Mechanical environment: - DnV class B - IACS E10 ( Direct mount on engines, compressors etc. ) EMC properties: According IACS E10, EN60945 Weight of module: 1.6 kg. Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
56
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Specification: Isolation power port: 50 VDC continuous 50 VAC 1 minute. Isolation: - Power: Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter) - CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler) - Serial line: Complete isolated (Opto coupler)
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
57
2 GETTING STARTED
2.1 Introduction
This chapter teaches you how to use the control functions and displays of the different DataChief C20 operator stations. It is intended for personnel just starting to use the system. The following subjects are covered: - Using the Remote Operator Station - Using the Midi Operator Station - Using the Local Operator Station - The Watch Calling System - Using the Watch Bridge Unit - Using the Watch Cabin Unit
58
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Getting started
2.2
Using the Remote Operator Station

2.2.1 Understanding the Operator Control Panel
The Operator Control Panel often called OCP is a specially designed keyboard that provides easy access to the operator functions. It is divided into separate function areas. Push buttons are combined with lamps to indicate alarms, status of the Extended Alarm System and to indicate main system functions.
Overview
The following illustration shows the layout ofthe OperatorControl Panel. The different buttons found on the panel can be divided into groups and are explained in the following.
Red LEDs - alarm group buttons Green LEDs - watch function buttons Yellow LEDs - project dependent buttons Mimic buttons Numeric keyboard Standard function buttons Trackball buttons Keyboard connector Trackball. Standard function buttons Alarm functions & display buttons
Power on LED
Figure 14 Operator Control Panel (OCP) layout.

Numeric keyboard and trackball buttons
DELETE Used to delete numeric input (from right to left) during an input sequence. (Backspace). Used for passive settings for alarm limits etc.
SPACE
ENTER
Ends a sequence of numeric input or activates editing. Displays the previous page in the selected page group. (Page Up)
PREVIOUS PAGE
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
59
NEXT PAGE ARROW BUTTON READ
Displays the next page in the selected page group. (Page Down) Used to move the cursor or the high-lighted field. There are four arrow keys; left, right, up and down. Used for addressing an object (i.e. pump, valve) after placing the cursor over it by moving the trackball.
DEUsed for giving a STOP, CLOSE or DEACTIACTIVATE VATE command to an object after addressing / STOP it using the READ button. ACTIVATE Used for giving a START, OPEN or ACTIVATE / START command to an object after addressing it using the READ button.
Alarm group buttons

LO, FO, FW, EX, CW, CA, DO, BW, MI, DS, BO, BR, OM, DG, SG, ES, FI, TS, ST, LS. When a new alarm occurs, the corresponding alarm group lamp starts flashing, and the alarm buzzer is activated. To display information about the alarm, push the button. New alarms are displayed in red colour, acknowledged alarms in yellow. The indicator stops flashing when all alarms in the group have been acknowledged, but remains lit until all alarm conditions have returned to normal. When this button is pushed, the colour graphics display shows a list of inhibit sources. When a system failure occurs, the corresponding indicator starts flashing, and the alarm buzzer is activated. To display information about the system failure, push the button. The indicator stops flashing when the alarm has been acknowledged, but remains lit until all alarm conditions have returned to normal.
INHIBIT POINTS
SYSTEM FAILURE
Alarm function and display buttons

When an alarm occurs the alarm buzzer and engine room horn is activated. Push the SOUND OFF button to stop it. ALARM SUMMARY Shows all active and unacknowledged alarms on the colour graphics display. Up to twentysix alarms can be displayed simultaneously. If there are more alarms, use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to see them all. SOUND OFF
60
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Getting started
ALARM HISTORY
Displays the last 2000 alarm events, with time and date. Twentysix alarms are displayed on each page. The last alarms are at the top of the list. To turn the pages, using the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons. This button is used to acknowledge alarms. If an Operator Control Panel group button has been pushed, the alarm acknowledge button will acknowledge all unacknowledged alarms on the colour graphics display. If more than 26 new alarms have occurred, the next page will automatically be displayed. If an Operator Control Panel alarm group button has not been pushed, pushing the Alarm Acknowledge button will acknowledge the latest three alarms displayed in the lower right corner of the display.
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE
Standard function buttons

COUNTERS DISPLAY DEVIATION PARAM. CONFIG. GROUP / ALARM GROUP DISPLAY SELECTED BARGR. DISPLAY SELECTED POINTS DISPLAY Displays counters and lap counters information. Menu for input and display of parameters for deviation calculation of exhaust gas temperatures. Toggles between all measuringpoints and the points in a group having an alarm status. Displays all measuringpoints within an Operator Control Panel alarm group. Displays preselected measuringpoints as bargraphs. Displays preselected measuringpoints.
SELECTED TREND Display preselected measuringpoints as trend curves. DISPLAY SET DATE & TIME SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY TAG DETAILS Used to adjust date & time. Displays system parameters and functions. Menu used to display details for measuringpoints and to change their parameters.
Logging buttons
AUTO LOG CONFIG MISC. LOGS Menu used to enable and adjust the auto log printout time. Menu used to activate printout of logs and set up the printer.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
61
Tank and cargo functions

SHIPS DISPLAY Displays total volume for each tank content type. Trim/list and draught display. Menu for manual trim/list specification and input and sea specific gravity input. Display of raw level/ullage, corrections for trim, list, sensor offset, specific gravity and corrected level/ullage. Tank level [m], filling [%], volume [m3], specific gravity [t/m3] and weight [t] display. Toggles between SEA and HARBOUR mode. This can be used to suppress tank alarms during the voyage. Tank content type, ullage [m], actual temperature [C], volume [m3], filling [%], volume correction factor, volume at 15 C [m3], weight air and US Barrels at 60 F. Tank content type, API, density at vac. 15C, density in air at 15C, density in air TC, temperature (T) [C], density correction factor and density at actual temperature.
LEVEL CORR. DISPLAY GENERAL TANK DISPLAY SEA HARBOUR SELECT CARGO TANK DISPLAY
CARGO API DISPLAY
Mimic display button

MIMIC DISPLAY Displays mimic window for process monitoring and/or process control.
Control functions buttons

HIGH / LOW RESET MASTER 1.ST. STAND BY NEXT STAND BY AUTO / MAN Toggles between high and low speed of pumps and fans. Reset function for controllable objects such as pumps, fans, compressors and generators. Master function for pumps, fans, compressors and generators. 1.st standby or stand by selection function for pumps, fans, compressors and generators. Stand by selection function for pumps, fans, compressors and generators. Auto/manual (semi auto) mode selection for pumps, fans, compressors, controllers and generators. Menu to decreasing or increasing illumination for the Operator Control Panel (OCP) and colour graphics display on the Bridge. To test the alarm buzzers, alarm display, net communication and alarm printer push the button. To turn the test off push the button again. To test all indicator lamps on the Operator Control Panel push the button.
Viewing conditions and testing buttons

MONITOR OCP DISPLAY ALARM TEST
LAMP TEST
62
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Getting started
Watch indication and calling functions buttons

BRIDGE WATCH Initiates Bridge Watch (unattended engine room). This means that the engine watch responsibility is transferred to the bridge. Initiates Engine Watch. This means that the engine watch responsibility is in engine control room mode. When this indicator lamp is lit the Chief Engineer is on duty, both in bridge- and engine watch. The ON DUTY indicator in the Chief Engineers cabin and in the engineers dayrooms are lit. When this button is pushed, the indicator lamp starts flashing, and the indicators and buzzers in all WatchCall panels in the engineers quarters are activated. To deactivate this function push the button again. When one or more of the 1st to 4th engineer on duty lamps are lit, the engineer on duty is in charge of the watch. The ON DUTY indicator in the engineers cabin and dayrooms are lit. When this button is pushed the indicator lamp starts flashing and the indicators and buzzer on the WatchCall panel in the duty engineers quarter is activated. To deactivate this function push the button again. Note: This function is only available as an alternative to a 4th Engineer button.
ENGINE WATCH
CHIEF ENG. ON DUTY
CALL ALL ENGINEERS
ENGINEERS ON DUTY
CALL DUTY ENGINEER
2.2.2
Systems without Operator Control Panel
Some systems are delivered without Operator Control Panels. These systems are operated through standard keyboard and mouse. In these systems the Operator Control Panel is displayed on the colour graphics monitor. Operation is similar for both types of systems. 1 2 Push the F1 function key to display the Operator Control Panel. Use the mouse to push the buttons and select the various display pages. F1: Operator Control Panel (OCP) display F2: Alarm/group display F3: Sound off F4: Alarm acknowledge F5: Tag tetails
The following fuction keys are used:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
63
Figure 15 Typical Operator Control Panel displayed on monitor.
2.2.3
Understanding the display
The Remote Operator Station includes a standard colour graphics display. The operator interacts with the display through the Operator Control Panel or through keyboard and mouse.
Overview
The following illustration explains the layout of the Remote Operator Station display. About button: Push the button to display information about the software version etc. Title window: Contains the title of the information currently displayed in the main window.
64
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Getting started
About button Title window
Status window Time window
Main window
Alarm window Function window
Figure 16 Main areas of the Remote Operator Station display. Status window: The status window is divided into two columns. These contains important status information for user settings. The following abbreviations are used: - Buz - OCP buzzer disabled. - ACK - Acknowledge limitation override enabled. - Mim - Mimic access override enabled. Time window: Shows current date and time.
Refer to page 107 for information on How to change time zone.
Main window: Contains the main display information such as alarm lists, bargraphs, trend displays,configuration data,mimic diagrams etc. Function window: Displays information related to user input. Alarm window: Displays the last four alarms independent of the information displayed in the main window.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
65
2.3
Using the Midi Operator Station

2.3.1 Overview
The Midi Operator Station, often called MOS is a specially designed operator panel that provides easy access to operator functions. It is used as a local operator station in larger systems or as the main operator station for more limited systems. The display examples shown in this manual are not always an exact copy of what you will see on the screen, as the presentation depends on your system configuration and choices of set-up.
2.3.2
Understanding the keyboard
Some of the key functions are general and can be applied at any time, other key functions are related to certain menu(s) and can only be applied when in the appropriate menu.
Escape Page down Page up Acknowledge Sound off
Clear Function keys F1 to F4
Figure 17 Keyboard layout.

ESC
Escape. Removes menus. Goes back to the previous picture in up to five steps by pushing repeatedly. Turns menus on. The displayed menu will vary with the operational context. Go to submenu or display. Confirms insertion and editing of data. Gives access to set-up displays.
MENU
ENTER
66
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Getting started
Page up. Moved the displayed information up a page in the selected group. Page down. Moved the displayed information down a page in the selected group. Sound off. Push to turn audible alarms off.
ACK
Alarm acknowledge. Four-way navigator key. Moves a square cursor up/down to select text in data displays. Moves a square cursor left/right/up/down and to select objects in mimic pictures.
F1 - F4
Function keys. The function is specified by the text next to the key (left side). Function keys have a one minute time-out to avoid accidental input. Push the Page up or Page down keys to active the functions keys again. Alpha-numeric keys for insertion of letters and numbers. Push the button repeatedly until the desired letter or number is displayed. Key to insert the following special characters (. - _). Push the button repeatedly until the desired character is displayed. Clear. Deletes data in enter or edit mode.
0-9
.-_
CLR
2.3.3
Understanding the display
The midi operator station includes a bright colour flat panel display. The operator interacts with the display through the keyboard. Window title: Contains the title of the information currently displayed in the main window. Menu window: Displays the various menus available. Scroll bar: Indicates how much of the total information in this window is displayed (similar to scroll bars used in standard Windows applications). Alarm window: Displays the last alarm independent of the information displayed in the main window.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
67
Window title
Menu window Scroll bar
Alarm window
Figure 18 Display layout example.

Window title Indicates that additional function buttons are available. Use the Page up and Page Down buttons to display them.
Alarm window
Figure 19 Display layout example including graphics.
68
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Getting started
Indicates that additional information is available. Use the navigator key to display it. Scroll bar
Alarm window
Figure 20 Display layout example.
2.3.4
Menu overview
The following menus are available: Main Menu 1 Alarm Menu 2 DPU Overview 3 Tag Selection Menu 4 Configuration Menu 5 Help Alarm Menu 1 Alarm History 2 Alarm Summary 3 Alarm Group Display Tag Menu 1 Tag Details 2 Mimic 3 Alarm Status 4 Main Menu
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
69
Tag Selection Menu 1 Control Menu 2 PMS Menu 3 MMI Tags 4 All Tags Control Menu 1 Pumps 2 Valves 3 Controllers 4 Standby Sets PMS Menu 1 Power Manager 2 Switch boards 3 Generators 4 Aux Breakers 5 Sync Breakers Configuration 1 User Access 2 Keyboard/Screen 3 Advanced 4 Printer 5 Self check
70
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Getting started
2.4
Using the Local Operator Station

2.4.1 Understanding the Local Operator Station
Overview
The Local Operator Station is used for local access to the Distributed Processing Units for inspection of process variables, local operation of equipment, adjustment of parameters and inspection of the built-in diagnostics.
LOS dPSC CAN A DPU 001 dPSC DPU 002 DPU 003 DPU 004
CAN B
Figure 21 Local Operator Station on CAN bus segment. The Local Operator Station (LOS) can connect to all Distributed Processing Units (DPU) connected to the same CAN-bus. From the local operator station you select a Distributed Processing Unit. As soon as connection is established, the Local Operator Station is able to control it.
Alarm indicators Display On line indicator
Display Display Display Display Line Line Line Line # # # # 1 2 3 4 : Menu Name Line ----------: Top Menu Item /Selection Line : : Prompt Texts for F1,F2,F3,F4
Push buttons
Alarm indicator 6
Figure 22 Local Operator Station layout The functions available are defined by the functionality of each individual type of Distributed Processing Unit. Pushbuttons are combined with lamps to indicate alarms, status of the extended alarm system and to indicate main system functions. The Local operator Station has the following main functions:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
71
Indicators
On Line Alarm 1 -5 Indicates that the Local Operator Station is connected to an active Distributed Processing Unit. These alarm indicators are active in an alarm system application. Labels are ship dependent. Indicates that the Local Operator Station is unable to get in touch with a Distributed Processing Unit. Many of the buttons have LED indicators. These indicators have different meanings dependent on the menu being operated.
Alarm 6 - Unit Fail
Other LED indicators
Display
Line 1 Displays module name, menu name, tag name etc. The display text depends on the menu selected. Displays the menu item that will be selected if the Menu Down button is pressed Application dependent information Application dependent information
Line 2 Line 3 Line 4
Push buttons
MENU o UP MENU i DOWN u d + r e p n SELECT UP SELECT DOWN ADJUST UP ADJUST DOWN DEFAULT ENTER Used to return to the menu level above the current menu. Used to select a more detailed menu for the item currently displayed in the second display line. Used to scroll the three bottom lines on the display to select a new menu, a tag or a parameter. Display lines are scrolled down. Used to scroll the three bottom lines for selection of a new menu, a tag or a parameter Display lines are scrolled up. Used to adjust the value of the selected parameter (displayed in the second line). The value is increased. Used to adjust the value of the selected parameter (displayed in the second line). The value is decreased. Used to jump to the first item in the selected menu. Used to confirm value adjustment and store adjusted value.
ARROW Navigation and adjustment buttons. Used to BUTTONS switch between overview 1 and 2. Used to force maximum adjustment speed, and to select next and previous tags when Tag Details are displayed.
72
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Getting started
1 a
F1-F4 ACK
Function buttons, the function depends on the selected menu. Used to acknowledge alarms. Used to turn the alarm sound off. Used to verify that lamps and buzzer are functioning. Also used by the Local Operator Station menu for other tests.
SOUND s OFF t TEST
LOS top menu DPU 001/01.00.20 _RAi16_ DPU 002/01.00.21 _RDi16_ DPU 003/01.00.22 _RAi16_ RAi16 Top Menu Alarm History ALARM DETAILS Alarm Summary ALARM DETAILS Tag Overview Menu RAi16 Tag Overview 1 2 3 Tag Details An.Input Parameter Explanation 48
DPU 004/01.00.23 _RAi16_
Figure 23 Typical Local Operator Station menu structure.
2.4.2
Menu structure
The Local Operator Station menu structure is a tree structure, similar to that found in many Microsoft Windows programs.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
73
Use the MENU UP and MENU DOWN buttons to go between different menu levels.
Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons to scroll up and down each menu.
2.4.3
How to access menus
The Local Operator Station can only be connected to one Distributed Process Unit at a time. Selecting the Distributed Process Unit is done from the Local Operator Stations Top Menu. Do the following: - At power on the LOS top menu will automatically be displayed. 1 If the top menu is not displayed, repeatedly push the MENU UP button until the LOS top menu is displayed. - Depending on the application, the display may look something like this:
LOS top menu;Select dpu: >DPU 001/01.00.20 _RAi16_ DPU 002/01.00.21 _RDi16_ DPU 003/01.00.22 _RAi16_
Figure 24 Local Operator Station top menu - The LOS top menu presents a list of available Distributed Processing Units (DPU) on the CAN bus. 2 3 Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons to scroll the list of Distributed Process Units. To view data for a Distributed Processing Unit move its name to the second line in the display. Push the MENU DOWN button to activate the top menu for that Distributed Processing Unit. - The online indicator is lit.
74
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Getting started
2.4.4
1
How to move between menu levels
Moving from one menu level to another, is done by pushing the MENU UP or MENU DOWN buttons:
2.4.5
How to move inside a menu
After selecting a Distributed Processing Unit (see How to access menus above) the top menu for that unit is displayed. Depending on the unit type, the display may look something like this:
- RAi16 top menu -->Tag Overview Menu Alarm History |Discon| DPU 001/01.00.20
Figure 25 Distributed Processing Unit top menu. 1 Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons to scroll the list of menu items for that Distributed Processing Unit. When the desired menu item is displayed on the second line, push the MENU DOWN button. This activates that menu item. To leave this menu item and return to the LOS top menu, push the F1 button.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
75
2.5
The watch calling system

2.5.1 Overview
The watch calling system is designed to allow periodically unmanned engine-room. It consists of: Watch Bridge Units (WBU). Watch Cabin Units (WCU). Remote Operator Station.
The Watch Bridge Units are used for
Indicate Watch Responsible area. Indicate who is On Duty. Indicate the current alarm status. Sounds a buzzer whenever a new alarm condition occurs and someone is On Duty. Allows you to contact (call) duty personnel.
The Watch Cabin Units are used for
Indicates who is On Duty. Indicates the current alarm status. Indicates when you are being called and who is calling. Sounds a buzzer whenever a new alarm condition occurs.
Figure 26 Basic Watch Calling System components.
2.5.2
How does the Watch Calling repeat alarm feature work
The repeat alarm feature of the Watch Calling System monitors all responses to an alarm condition to ensure that the alarm is acknowledged. The repeat alarm feature distributes the alarms using three sequences to ensure that the alarm will not go unacknowledged:
76
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Getting started
The first-time/original alarm is relayed to:
- The area designated as Watch Responsible. - The On Duty engineers Watch Cabin Units. - The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas.
The second-time/1st repeat alarm:
After a set period of time, if the alarm remains unacknowledged, it is repeated and relayed to: - The area designated as Watch Responsible. - The On Duty engineers Watch Cabin Units. - The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas.
The third-time/2nd repeat alarm:
After a set period of time, if the alarm is still not acknowledged, it is repeated and relayed to: - The area designated as Watch Responsible. - The Watch Cabin Units for ALL QUALIFIED engineers. - The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
77
2.6
Using the Watch Bridge Unit

2.6.1 Explanation of controls and indicators
Two different types of Watch Bridge Units are available: The LCD-type has a 4 row by 40 characters display and seven alarm groups. The LED-type has nineteen alarm groups. The following illustrations describes the main functionality of the two types.
Used to SELECT alarm summary, selected points summary or time display. Indicates the officer having on-duty status. Used to display TAG DETAILS. These alarms are divided into groups for handling and defining priority.
Indicate if the engineers safety system is active. Used to call on duty officers.
SYSTEM FAIL Indicates that the unit has failed. Indicates the location having watch responsability. Used to scroll alarms on the display SOUND OFF Push to silence the buzzer.
LAMP TEST Push to check that all indicators are OK.
Figure 27 Watch Bridge Unit, LCD type.

Indicates the officer having on-duty status. These alarms are divided into groups for handling and defining priority.
Indicate if the engineers safety system is active. Used to call on duty officers.
SYSTEM FAIL Indicates that the unit has failed. Indicates the location having watch responsability. Used to increase or descrease text illumination. SOUND OFF Push to silence the buzzer.
LAMP TEST Push to check that all indicators are OK.
Figure 28 Watch Bridge Unit, LED type.
78
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Getting started
The main difference between the two types are that the LCD type can display individual alarm messages, while the LED type has a larger number of alarm groups. - The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) type will display date and time when no-one is ON DUTY. - For the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type all indicators will be dark when no-one is ON DUTY. - The repeat alarm function is activated if an alarm is not acknowledged within a set period of time.
2.6.2
1 2
How to adjust illumination for LED type panels
Background lighting: Use the arrow buttons. Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and then use the arrow buttons.
2.6.3
How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels
1 2
Background lighting: Push LAMP TEST then SELECT and use the arrow buttons. Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrow buttons.
2.6.4
1
How to test the panel
Push LAMP TEST to check that the LEDs illuminate and the buzzer sounds. - If the LEDs remain dark or the buzzer is silent, replace the panel. There are no field serviceable parts inside.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
79
2.7
Using the Watch Cabin Unit

2.7.1 Explanation of controls and indicators
Two different types of Watch Cabin Units are available: The LCD-type has a 4 row by 40 characters display and six alarm groups. The LED-type has seventeen alarm groups. The following illustrations describes the main functionality of the two types.
Used to SELECT alarm summary, selected points summary or time display. Indicates the officer having on-duty status. Used to display TAG DETAILS. These alarms are divided into groups for handling and defining priority.
SYSTEM FAIL Indicates that the unit has failed. LAMP TEST Push to check that all indicators are OK. Indicates that you have been called. Used to scroll alarms on the display SOUND OFF Push to silence the buzzer.
Figure 29 Watch Cabin Unit, LCD type.

Indicates the officer having on-duty status. These alarms are divided into groups for handling and defining priority.
SYSTEM FAIL Indicates that the unit has failed. LAMP TEST Push to check that all indicators are OK. Indicates that you have been called. Used to increase or descrease text illumination. SOUND OFF Push to silence the buzzer.
Figure 30 Watch Cabin Unit, LED type.
80
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Getting started
The main difference between the two types are that the LCD type can display individual alarm messages, while the LED type has a larger number of alarm groups. - The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) type will display date and time when no-one is ON DUTY. - For the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type all indicators will be dark when no-one is ON DUTY. - The repeat alarm function is activated if an alarm is not acknowledged within a defined period of time.
2.7.2
How to respond to alarms
When an alarm condition occur the buzzer will sound and the alarm is indicated on the Watch Cabin Unit. Do the following: 1 Push SOUND OFF. 2 Read the alarm information on the display or the text next to the indicator. 3 4 Take appropriate action. Check that the alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm situation no longer exist.
2.7.3
1 2
How to adjust illumination for LED type panels
Background lighting: Use the arrow buttons. Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and then use the arrow buttons.
2.7.4
How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels
1 2
Background lighting: Push LAMP TEST then SELECT and use the arrow buttons. Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrow buttons.
2.7.5
1
How to test the panel
Push LAMP TEST to check that the LEDs illuminate and the buzzer sounds. - If the LEDs remain dark or the buzzer is silent, replace the panel. There are no field serviceable parts inside.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
81
3 ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM

3.1 Introduction
This chapter contains a detail descriptions of how to operate the DataChief C20 alarm and monitoring system from the different types of operator stations. It is intended for users already familiar with the Getting Started section of this manual. The following subjects are covered: - Remote Operator Station - Midi Operator Station - Watch Bridge Unit - Watch Cabin Unit - ShipViewer
Figure 31 DataChief C20 Operation.
82
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3.2

3.2.1 How to handle alarm events
When a process parameter enters an alarm state, the following takes place: - The alarm text with time, date and identification is printed. - The alarm group indicator on the Operator Control Panel starts flashing. - The buzzer in the Operator Control Panel is activated. - The alarm is indicated in red in the lower right corner of the colour graphics display. - External alarm devices such as engine room horn are activated. Do the following:
SOUND OFF
1 2
Push the SOUND OFF button. - This turns off the external alarm devices and the buzzer. Push the flashing alarm group button. - This display(s) the alarms on the colour graphics display in red.
ALARM ACK
3 4
Push the ALARM ACK. button. - This changes the alarm text from red to yellow. Attend to the alarm situation.
Note
The last four unacknowledged alarms are always displayed on the lower right side of the colour graphics display and may be acknowledged without selecting group display.
3.2.2
How alarms are printed after a black-out
Loss of ships power
The Distributed Processing Units (24 Volt DC) and the Remote operator stations (230 Volt AC) are supported by separate uninterruptible power supplies. The system will maintain power for 30 minutes after a blackout. Each Distributed Processing Unit timestamps its own alarms immediately when they occur. This timestamping is very accurate. All alarms are sorted and printed out according to the time they were detected.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
83
Loss of power to Remote Operator Stations
The Distributed Processing Units store all the alarm information. If the Remote Operator Stations loose power the the system will continue to operate, and can be monitored or controlled from the Local Operator Stations. When power is restored to the Remote Operator Stations all alarms are sorted and printed out according to the time they were detected.
Loss of power to Distributed Processing units
If you loose power to the Distributed Processing Units the system will not be working for the duration of the power interruption. All settings are how ever retained and as soon as power is restored the system will be up and running.
3.2.3
How to display alarm summary
This function will display all active alarms. Do the following:

ALARM SUMMARY
Push the ALARM SUMMARY button. - A summary of all active and unacknowledged alarms are displayed on the colour graphics display. Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists.
3.2.4
How to display alarm history
This function displays a chronological list of alarm events. Do the following:

ALARM HISTORY
Push the ALARM HISTORY button. - A complete chronological list of all alarm events are displayed on the colour graphics display. The newest alarms are displayed on top. * Unacknowledged alarms are displayed in red. * Acknowledged alarms are displayed in yellow. * Cleared alarm conditions are displayed in green. Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists.
3.2.5
How to display alarm group information
This function is used to view the tags in an alarm group. The value and alarm limits for each tag is displayed. Do the following:
84
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
GROUP DISPLAY
Push the GROUP DISPLAY button. - The prompt Select group: is displayed in the lower left of the colour graphics display.
Type in an alarm group number and push ENTER, or push the desired alarm group button on the Operator Control Panel. - The group name is displayed with the tag highlighted at the top.
Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists.
3.2.6
How to display counters and reset counters
This function is used to view running hours for pumps, main engine, accumulated values for analogue sensors etc. The total accumulated value and lap value for each tag is displayed. Do the following: - Requires that Reset Counters is enabled
COUNTER DISPLAY
See How to enable resetting of counters on page 96.
Push the COUNTER DISPLAY button. - The system counters are displayed.
A counter value may be changed by using the UP/DOWN arrow keys to highlight it. Push ENTER to address it.
- The prompt Enter new Counter value: is displayed in the lower left of the colour graphics display. 4 Type in the new counter value. 5 Push ENTER. - It is possible to reset all counters selecting Reset all counters or Reset all lap counters.
See How to display system information on page 92.
3.2.7
How to display offscan alarms
This function is used to view tags set to offscan. The value and alarm limit for each tag are displayed. Do the following:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
85
GROUP DISPLAY
Type in -2 (minus 2).
Push ENTER. - Offscan tags are displayed.
Use the PREVIOUS PAGE and NEXT PAGE buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists.
3.2.8
How to toggle between group and alarm display
Do the following:
GROUP DISPLAY
Type in a group number, or push the desired group button on the Operator Control Panel. Push ENTER - The group name is displayed with the tag highlighted at the top.
GROUP DISPLAY
Push the GROUP/ALARM button. - For each push of the button the display toggles between all tags and tags in alarm state.
3.2.9
How to acknowledge alarms
Separate and group alarms can be acknowledged while a mimic-, an alarm group- or an alarm summary display is active. There are three ways to acknowledge alarms:
Method 1
To acknowledge up to tree of the active alarms displayed in the lower right corner of colour graphics display do the following:
86
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
ALARM ACK
Push the ALARM ACK. button. - A maximum of three alarms are acknowledged at the same time. Any unacknowledged alarms will replace those just acknowledged.
Method 2
Do the following:
ALARM HISTORY
Push the ALARM HISTORY button. - The alarm history is displayed.
ALARM ACK
Push the ALARM ACK. button. - A maximum of three alarms are acknowledged at the same time. The alarm text turns yellow. When the alarm condition returns to normal, the text turns green.
Method 3
Do the following:
ALARM GROUP
Push the ALARM GROUP button.
ALARM ACK
Push the ALARM ACK. button. - All active alarms shown on the colour graphics monitor are acknowledged. If there are more unacknowledged alarms push PAGE DOWN to acknowledge the additional alarms. The alarm texts changes from red to yellow. When all alarms have been acknowledged the alarm button is steady lit. When all alarm conditions in the selected alarm group have returned to normal, the colour graphics display is cleared.
3.2.10 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions

When the Remote Operator Station is placed on the bridge or in a similar places it is useful to set the viewing conditions for day, dusk or night viewing. You can also turn the screen saver on/off and adjusting the time delay before the screen saver is turned on.
Monitor Dimmer Function
MONITOR OCP DISPLAY
Push the MONITOR OCP DISPLAY button.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
87
Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons or the trackball to select Day, Dusk/Dawn or Night. Push ENTER. Push 1. Push ENTER. - The selected viewing condition is set.
4 5
OCP Dimmer Function
Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons or the trackball to select the lamp intensity you wish to change. Push ENTER. Type in a number between 1 and 7. Push ENTER. - 7 will give the brightest light.
1-7
8 9
Screen Saver
10
Use the arrow buttons or the trackball to select Screen Saver Delay. Push ENTER. - The text Enter new delay in minutes (0 to turn saver off): is displayed on the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
11
12 13 Note
Type in the delay time. Push ENTER. - Maximum delay time is 60 minutes.
The screen saver is automatically turned of if any of the input devices are activated or a new alarm occurs.
3.2.11 How to print a Complete log

A remote operator station can only be connected to one printer. This printer will have a defined function: Alarm printer
88
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Log printer If there is only one printer in the system, the printer will serve both functions. Do the following to activate printouts:
MISC. LOGS
Push the MISC. LOGS button.
2 3
Select Complete log using the UP/DOWN arrow buttons. Push ENTER. - The prompt Complete log (1=start, 0=abort) is displayed in the lower left of the display.
4 5
Push 1 to select printout. Push ENTER. - The printer starts printing the log. - Status indication for all other logs will change to BUSY. - When the printout is completed, status indication for all logs will go back to READY.
M/S EAGLE KALDNES COMPLETE LOG Tagname AE001 AE002 FO001 FO001 LO001 LO001 ME001 ME002 ME003 ME004 ME005 Tag description STARTING AIR CHARGE AIR F.O. PRESS F.O. TEMP L.O. PRESS L.O. TEMP STARTING AIR CYL.1 LUBRICATION CYL.2 LUBRICATION CYL.3 LUBRICATION CYL.4 LUBRICATION NORCONTROL AUTOMATION A/S HULL NO: 10 93-12-27 12:16:45 Func Value LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN Eng.unit Alarm OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN DC2000 PAGE 1 Low Lim. High lim. ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( , , , , , , , , , , , ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
Figure 32 Typical example of Complete log.
3.2.12 How to print an Alarm Summery log

ALARM SUMMARY
- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Alarm Summary.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
89
3.2.13 How to print a Level Correction log

LEVEL
CORRECTION
- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Level Correction.
3.2.14 How to print a Tank log

TANK LOG
- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Tank log.
3.2.15 How to print a Counters log

COUNTER LOG
- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Counters log.
3.2.16 How to print an Inhibit log

INHIBIT LOG
- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Inhibit log.
3.2.17 How to print an Offscan log

OFFSCAN LOG
- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Offscan log.
3.2.18 How to print Group log

Do the following to activate printouts:
MISC. LOGS
2 3
Select Group log using the UP/DOWN arrow buttons.
Push ENTER. - The prompt Select group log: is displayed in the lower left of the display. 4 Type in the group number. 5 6 7 Push ENTER Or push one of the alarm group buttons. Push ENTER. - The printer will start printing the log. - Status indication for all other logs will change to BUSY. - When the printout is completed, status indication for all logs will go back to READY.
90
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3.2.19 How to print a Selected points log

A Selected points log can only be printed from the Remote Operator Station fitted configured to do that. Note Printing a Selected Points log on demand, will clear the interval set for printing of Selected points log.
MISC. LOGS
See How to set interval for Selected points log on page 111.
2 3
Select Sel. Points Log using the UP/DOWN arrow buttons. Push ENTER.
- The prompt Selectlog number: is displayed in the lower left of the display. - The note Selected Log Interval will be deleted is displayed. 4 Type in the number (between 1 and 5) of the selected points log you wish to print. 5 Push ENTER . - The printer starts printing the log. - Status indication for all other logs will change to BUSY. - When the printout is completed, status indication for all logs will go back to READY.
3.2.20 How to stop a printout

MISC. LOGS
Select the log you want to stop using the UP/DOWN arrow buttons. Push ENTER. Push 0 to stop the printout. - The printing stops when the printer buffer is empty.
Printer responsible parameters
- These parameters indicates which Remote Operator Station is responsible for printing alarms and logs.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
91
Printer set-up parameters
- A list of current printer settings, such as printer type and form feed length. The later is useful when ordering printer paper. These parameters are normally set during commissioning.
3.2.21 How to display system information

This function is used to display various system information such as ship and station information, software version, functions, limited access override etc. and allows further access to displaying and controlling system parameters. Do the following:
SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button. - The system information display is shown on the colour graphics display.
3.2.22 About password access

SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
An access control system limits the possibilities to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters or information. The status of this system is available by pushing System Information Display.
Figure 33 System Information Display.
92
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
The access control system is based on the use of passwords. The following password levels are available: - Acknowledge: Allows acknowledging of alarms. Used to receive and acknowledge alarms from Remote Operator Stations that normally wouldnt receive them, such as on the bridge. When typing in the password you can also set the expiration time.The password expiration time can be set to any number of minutes. When set to 0 the password will not automatically expire. Push the Release Access button in Tag Details or change the status to NO in the System Configuration Display. - Mimic: Allows system control through the mimic pictures. Used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) components you normally dont have access to, such as for instance operating the power management from the cargo control room. The password expiration time can be set to any number of minutes. When set to 0 the password will not automatically expire. Push the Release Access button in Tag Details or change the status to NO in the System Configuration Display.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
93
Figure 34 Password window. - Commissioning: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups, enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for each Remote Operator Station. Access automatically expire after 30 minutes or when pushing the Release Access button in Tag Details. - Superuser: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. Access automatically expire after 30 minutes or when pushing the Release Access button in Tag Details. - Password: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays and event limits. This password does not automatically expire. Push the Release Access button in Tag Details or change the status to NO in the System Configuration Display. - Yes: In the System Configuration Display indicates that access at this level is available. - No: In the System Configuration Display indicates that access at this level is not available. Note Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allows unauthorized access to vital system functions. If you try to make changes without having inserted the right password the system will automatically request it.
3.2.23 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information

This procedure allows display of all parameters for each tag such as values , alarm status, alarm limits etc. Do the following:
SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
94
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Unit display. Push ENTER. - The prompt Enter unit number: is displayed on the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
4 5
Type in the number of the DPU. Push ENTER. - The information about the selected processing unit is displayed.
Use NEXT PAGE or PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to select the next or previous Distributed Processing Unit.
3.2.24 Info field enable

- This parameter is for Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems use only.
3.2.25 How to enable changing of Eng. unit/counts

SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Eng. unit change. Push ENTER. - The prompt Eng.unit counts/change enable (1=on, 0=off): is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
4 5
Type 1. Push ENTER to enable changing of Eng.unit/counts.

Refer to page 117 for information on How to change tag parameters for an analogue channel and page 120 for information on How to change tag parameters for a digital channel.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
95
3.2.26 How to enable resetting of counters

This function is used to reset counters for running hours for pumps, main engine, accumulated values for analogue sensors etc.
SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button. - The system information display is shown on the colour graphics display. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Reset counters. Push ENTER. - The prompt Reset all counter enable (1=on, 0=off): is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display. Type 1 . Push ENTER to enable resetting of all counters in the COUNTERS DISPLAY.
Refer to How to display and reset counters on page 85 for more information.
4 5
3.2.27 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms

This function allows acknowledging of alarms from Remote Operator Stations which would not normally allow it.
SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button. - The system information display is shown on the colour graphics display. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Acknowledge.
Push ENTER. - The prompt Enter acknowledge limit. override password: is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display. 4 Type in the password. 5 Push ENTER. - The text Acknowledge limitation override enabled is displayed in the function window. - You may now acknowledge alarms from this Remote Operator Station.
96
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Note
The text ACCESS OVERRIDE ACK will be displayed in the status area until the override is reset, refer page 65.
3.2.28 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves

This function allows controlling of pumps and valves from Remote Operator Stations which would not normally allow it.
SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Mimic. Push ENTER. - The prompt Enter mimic limit. override password: is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
4 5
Type in the password. Push ENTER. - The text Mimic access override enabled is displayed. - You may now control pumps and valves from this Remote Operator Station.
Note
The text ACCESS OVERRIDE MIM will be displayed in the status area until the override is reset, refer page 65.
3.2.29 How to silence the Operator Control Panel buzzer

SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after OCP Buzzer silent. Push ENTER. - The prompt Enter OCP Buzzer disable password: is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
Type in the password.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
97
5 Note
Push ENTER. - The Operator Control Panel (OCP) buzzer is now disabled.
The text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will be displayed in the status area until the disabling is turned off, refer page 65.
3.2.30 How to set tags to offscan
Refer to page 117 How to change parameters for an analogue channel or page 120 for How to change parameters for a digital channel.
3.2.31 How to change alarm limits
3.2.32 How to change alarm delay
3.2.33 How to access the Watch Calling configuration

This function allows configuration of the Watch Calling System.
SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Configuration Menu. Push ENTER. - The prompt Enter 1 to Configure Watch Call: is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
4 5
Type 1. Push ENTER. - The Watch Calling configuration pages are displayed.
98
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Use the use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between the pages.
3.2.34 How to set the On Duty engineer

The engineer to be assigned to On Duty must have qualifications that comply with the on duty assignment. The system verifies each duty assignment by checking the engineer qualifications table. A message will appear on the screen if the engineer is not qualified for the assigned duty. The following example shows the procedure for selecting an engineer: Officer On Duty Officer Qual.Duty Chief Engineer E N 1st Engineer E E 2nd Engineer E N 3rd Engineer N N Chief Cargo M N 1st Cargo C C
f f f f f f
Figure 35 On Duty engineer including qualifications. Explanation to the abbreviations: * E - Engine duty * C - Cargo duty * M - Multipurpose duty * N - No qualifications - This procedure requires that the system is in engine control room watch. 1 Use the procedure as described in How to access the Watch Calling configuration on page 98. 2 Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between the pages. Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select the On Duty engineer. Push ENTER. - The prompt Officer on Engine duty (1=Engine duty): is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
99
5 6
Type 1. Push ENTER. - The engineer On Duty has been set - the indicator turns green.
3.2.35 How to select the Watch Responsible location

Note This procedure requires that an engineer is set to on duty. Refer to How to set the On Duty engineer above. The engine control room is the default Watch Responsible location. Use the following procedure to select an alternative Watch Responsible location. This can be done in the following three ways:
On the Operator Control Panel
Push the button for the watch responsible location you want (BRIDGE WATCH, ENG WATCH). - The indicator for the new location will flash until accepted at that location, for example the Watch Bridge Unit panel on the bridge. - The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibility has been accepted. The indicator for the previous location is switched off - not lit.
On the Watch Bridge Unit
Push the button for the watch responsible location you want (BRIDGE WATCH, ENG WATCH buttons). - The indicator for the new location will flash until accepted at that location, for example the Remote Operator Station in the engine control room. - The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibility has been accepted. The indicator for the previous location is switched off - not lit.
On the Remote operator station display
Use the procedure as described in How to access the Watch Calling configuration on page 98. Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between the pages.
100
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select the Watch Responsibility Area. Responsibility f Bridge Watch F Engine CR Watch Figure 36 Watch responsibility location before change.
Push ENTER. - The prompt Activate operation (1=active): is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
5 6
Type 1. Push ENTER. Responsibility F Bridge Watch f Engine CR Watch Figure 37 Watch responsibility location after change. - The indicator for the new location will flash until accepted at that location, for example the Watch Bridge Unit panel on the bridge. - The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibility has been accepted. The indicator for the previous location is switched off - not lit.
3.2.36 How to call the On Duty engineer or All engineers

From the Remote Operator Station, you can call the On Duty engineers, or All engineers with engine or cargo qualifications, or with engine and cargo (multipurpose qualifications). The following is an example for calling all qualified engineers (Call All Engine) and for calling the On Duty engineers (Call Engine Duty) Individual ship configurations may vary. This can be done in the following three ways:
On the Operator Control Panel
CALL DUTY ENG.
Push the CALL DUTY ENG. or CALL ALL ENG. button. - The call indicator will be lit and the selected engineer called.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
101
CALL ALL ENG.
To cancel the call push the button again.
On the Watch Bridge Unit

CALL DUTY ENG.
Push the CALL DUTY ENG. or CALL ALL ENG. button. - The call indicator will be lit and the selected engineer called.
CALL ALL ENG.
To cancel the call push the button again.
On the Remote operator station display
Use the procedure as described in How to access the Watch Calling configuration on page 98. Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between the pages.
Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select the engineers to call. Calling officers f Calling Engine Duty f Calling Cargo Duty F Calling All Engine f Calling All Cargo Figure 38 Calls all engine qualified officers. Calling officers F Calling Engine Duty f Calling Cargo Duty f Calling All Engine f Calling All Cargo Figure 39 Calls the On Duty engineer.
Push ENTER. - The prompt Activate call (1=Activate): is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
1
102
Type 1.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Push ENTER.
- The call indicator will be lit and the selected engineer called. 7 To cancel the call repeat the procedure selecting CANCEL CALL (0=cancel):.
3.2.37 How to define the engineer qualifications

When a new engineer reports aboard with qualifications different from the engineer being replaced, the qualifications table needs to be updated. The following example shows a qualification change for the the 3rd engineer: Officers Qualifications Officers Chief Engineer 1st Engineer 2nd Engineer 3rd Engineer Chief Officer 1st Officer Qualifications Engine Engine Engine Engine Multipurpose Cargo
Figure 40 The qualification section checks that the On Duty engineer is qualified for the assigned duty. 1 Use the procedure as described in How to access the Watch Calling configuration on page 98. Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between the pages. Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select the qualifications for the engineer. Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter qual (0=None, 1=Engine, 2=Cargo, 3=Multipurpose): is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display. 5 Type the relevant number. 6 Push ENTER. - The new qualifications have been set.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
103
3.2.38 How to define watch calling Off-Duty mode

When an engineer or group of engineers are on duty the Watch Bridge and Watch Cabin units are automatically set to On Duty mode. When an engineer is Off Duty his/her panel(s) can be defined as either active or passive:
What is Off Duty active
The panels will not sound an alarm but will continue to display alarm information. Unacknowledged alarms will have an * in front.
What is Off Duty passive
The panels will not sound an alarm. LCD-type panels will display date and time information only. Pushing the controls on a LCD-type panel will display the alarms. Unacknowledged alarms will have an * in front. (The LEDs on the LED-type panels will remain dark). 1 Use the procedure as described in How to access the Watch Calling configuration on page 98. Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between the pages. Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select the engineer. Push ENTER. - The prompt Enter panel(s) mode(1=Active, 0=Passive): is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display. 5 6 Type the relevant number. Push ENTER. - The new Off-Duty mode have been set.
104
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Off-Duty Panel Mode Officers Chief Engineer 1st Engineer 2nd Engineer 3rd Engineer Chief Officer 1st Officer Mode Active Passive Passive Passive Passive Passive
Figure 41 engineers Off-Duty panel mode.
3.2.39 How to define Watch Calling panel groups for on duty engineers
Each On Duty engineer has a group of panels defined as belonging to that engineer-position. These are the panels in his/her cabin, office and in public areas. When an engineer is On duty, each of these panels are in On Duty active mode. Since each ships configuration is different the illustration may differ from your system. Note This configuration can only be done at the master Remote Operator Station. 1 Use the procedure as described in How to access the Watch Calling configuration on page 98. Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between the pages. Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select the panel group (Chief Engineer, 1st Engineer etc.). Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter Group number to assign panel to: is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display. 5 Type the relevant number. 6 7 8 Push ENTER. Type in the group number. Push ENTER.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
105
KONGSBERG
WATCH CALLING CONFIGURATION

Group Chief Engineer 1st Engineer 2nd Engineer 3rd Engineer Chief Officer 1st Officer Public Public Public Mode Operational Operational Connecting Operational Operational Operational Operational Operational Operational
Last Change
1 of 2
Date Time
Panel Configuration
Panel S/N 00000000000001 00000000000002 00000000000003 00000000000004 00000000000005 00000000000006 00000000000007 00000000000008 00000000000009
This column lists the time and date of change for each panel
11:07:41 12:00:00 02:03:00 10:10:23 10:22:09 10:28:34 10:32:27 10:44:12 10/56:02
08/11-2001 12/12--2001 06/10--2001 07/10--2001 07/10--2001 07/10--2001 07/10--2001 07/10--2001 07/10--2001
Each panel has a unique serial number. Each panel can be defined to a group so that all alarms to the On Duty officer are sent to all panels defined for the position, and to public areas. For example, all panels defined as Chief Engineer will be active when the Chief Engineer is On Duty.
Apply Changes
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Groups
Public Chief Engineer 1st Engineer 2nd Engineer 3rd Engineer Chief Officer 1st Officer
Message area which tells you the codes to choose the selection.
Figure 42 One of the Watch Calling configuration pages. 9 Place the cursor on the display area APPLY CHANGES and push the READ button. - The change is now selected.
10 11
To apply the change push 1. Push ENTER. Groups 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Public Chief Engineer 1st Engineer 2nd Engineer 3rd Engineer Chief Officer 1st Officer
Figure 43 Available Watch Cabin Unit groups.
106
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Panel Configuration Panel S/N 00000000000001 00000000000002 00000000000003 00000000000004 00000000000005 00000000000006 00000000000007 00000000000008 00000000000009 Group Chief Engineer 1st Engineer 2nd Engineer 3rd Engineer Chief Officer 1st Officer Public Public Public
Figure 44 Panel serial numbers and group assignment.
3.2.40 How to change time zone

Used to change time zone when sailing eastward or westward.
SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Timezone.
Push ENTER. - The prompt Enter password: is displayed in the function window at the lower left side of the colour graphics display. 4 Type in the password. 5 Push ENTER. - The following dialogue is displayed. 6 Select the new time zone and push OK.
Note
If the system is fitted with a master clock, all time changes must be made there.
3.2.41 How to change system time

Note Use the change time zone function above when going between different time zones. The DataChief C20 system time is set to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC formerly known as GMT), and only minor corrections such as if the time is not quite correct should be made here!
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
107
Figure 45 Change Time zone dialogue box.

SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Change system time. Push ENTER. - The prompt Enter password: is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
4 5
Type in the password. Push ENTER. - The following dialogue is displayed.
Figure 46 Set system time dialogue box.
108
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Type in the local date and time and push OK. - The new date and time is transferred to the other Remote Operator Stations in the network if the Remote Operator Station you are working at is set up to transfer this data.
7 Note
Select the time zone and push OK.
If the system is fitted with a master clock, all time changes must be made there.
3.2.42 How to make your own list of selected tags

The system allows you to create up to five display pages containing your own selection of tags. Each page can include up to 20 tags. Tags can be combined from different alarm groups. Do the following:
SELECTED POINTS DISPLAY
Push the SELECTED POINTS DISPLAY button. - In the function window in the lower left corner of the colour graphics display the text Log no. is shown.
1-5
Note
Enter a number between 1 and 5.
If you want to create a new display the number should not previously have been used to create a selected points display! - The texts ADD, DELETE and EXIT will be displayed at the top of the screen. 3 4 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to highlight ADD. Push ENTER. - The text Select group: will be displayed in bottom left of the colour graphics display. 5 Push the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags from or enter the alarm group number. Push ENTER. - The tags in the selected alarm group are displayed on the right side of the colour graphics display. 7 8 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the tags you want. Push ENTER to select it. - The selected tag is displayed on the left side of the colour graphics display.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
109
9 10 11
If the tag list fills more than one page use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between them. To select an other tag from the same alarm group go to 5. To select a tag from a different alarm group go to 3. Should you want to remove a tag from your list use the arrow buttons to highlight DELETE. Push ENTER. Use the arrow buttons to select the tag you want to remove. Push ENTER.
12 13 14
- The tag is removed from the list. 15 Use the arrow buttons to highlight EXIT. 16 Push ENTER. - Your list of selected tags is shown with values and limits.
3.2.43 How to change a list of selected tags

Your list of selected tags can be modified at any time. Remember there is a maximum of 20 tags per list. Do the following:
Push the SELECTED POINTS DISPLAY button.
- In the lower left corner of the colour graphics display the text Select log number: is shown. 2 Enter the number of the selected tags list you want to change (between 1 and 5). 3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select CONFIG in the lower right corner.
- The texts ADD, DELETE and EXIT will be displayed at the top of the screen. 4 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow button to highlight ADD if you want to add tags and push ENTER. If you want to DELETE tags go to 9. - The text Select group: will be displayed in bottom left of the colour graphics display. 5 Push one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags from. - The tags in the selected alarm group are displayed on the right side of the colour graphics display.
110
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
6 7
Use the arrow buttons to highlight the tags you want. Push ENTER to select it. - The tag is displayed on the left side of the colour graphics display.
If the tag list fills more than one page use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between them.
- To select an other tag from the same alarm group go to 6. To select a tag from a different alarm group go to 4. 9 Should you want to remove a tag from your list use the arrow buttons to highlight DELETE. 10 11 12 Push ENTER. Use the arrow buttons to select the tag you want to remove. Push ENTER.
- The tag is removed from the list. 13 Use the arrow buttons to highlight EXIT. 14 Push ENTER. - Your updated list of tags will be displayed with values and limits.
3.2.44 How to set the interval for selected points log

Note A Selected points log can only be printed from the Remote Operator Station configured to print this log.
Push the SELECTED POINTS DISPLAY button. - In the lower left corner of the colour graphics display the text Select log number: is shown.
1-5
Enter the number of the selected tags list you want to log (between 1 and 5). Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select CONFIG in the lower right corner.
- The texts ADD, DELETE ,EXIT and INTERVAL will be displayed at the top of the screen. 4 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow button to highlight INTERVAL.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
111
Push ENTER. - The text Enter log printout interval (hh.mm): will be displayed in bottom left of the colour graphics display.
Type in the print interval using the specified format (hh.mm) and push ENTER. Push the SPACE button and ENTER when you want to remove the interval.
3.2.45 How to make your own trend display

The system allows you to create up to five different trend log displays containing your own selection of tags. Each display can include up to eight tags. Tags can be combined from different alarm groups. The trend log displays input as curves as a function of time. Do the following:
SELECTED TRENDS DISPLAY
Push the SELECT TREND DISPLAY button. - In the lower left corner of the colour graphics display the text Select log number: is shown.
1-5
Note
The number should not previously have been used to create a trend display! - The texts ADD, DELETE and EXIT will be displayed at the top of the screen. 3 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow button to highlight ADD. 4 Push ENTER.
- The text Select group: will be displayed in the bottom left of the colour graphics display. 5 Push one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags from or enter the alarm group number. 6 Push ENTER.
- The tags in the selected alarm group are displayed on the right side of the colour graphics display. 7 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the tags you want.
112
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Push ENTER to select it. - The tag is displayed on the left side of the colour graphics display.
9 10 11
If the tag list fills more than one page use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between them. To select an other tag from the same alarm group go to 5. To select a tag from a different alarm group go to 3. Should you want to remove a tag from your list use the arrow buttons to highlight DELETE. Push ENTER. Use the arrow buttons to select the tag you want to remove. Push ENTER. - The tag is removed from the list. Use the arrow buttons to highlight EXIT. Push ENTER. - Your trend display of selected tags will be displayed.
12 13 14 15 16
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
113
Figure 47 Typical trend log display.

Explanation to the trendlog display
Selected trend tags: Up to eight trend tags can be monitored simultaneously. These are displayed in different colours with their current value. Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to select one of the tags. The value scale will then be displayed in the actual unit (temp, pressure, etc.)for that tag, using trend low and high range as minimum and maximum values. To select tags see How to make your own trend display above. Value scale: Normally 0 to 100% - white scale. When selecting one of the trend tags (see Selected trend tags) the scale will be displayed in the same colour as that tag, and will be scaled in the unit for that tag. - Trend low range: The minimum value for the value scale. Used when selecting one of the trend tags (see Selected trend tags). Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to select it and type in a new value. - Trend high range: The maximum value for the value scale. Used when selecting one of the trend tags (see Selected trend tags). Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to select it and type in a new value. Time scale: The selected time scale for the trend display.
114
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Time span: You can vary the time span of the trend display between 6 minutes and 120 hours. Push the button so that the current time span is displayed and use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to change it. Grid: Pushing the button turns the grid on/off. Stop: Pushing the button freezes the trend display (no new samples are added). Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow keys to move the trend cursor along the time scale. The value for each tag will be displayed as the cursor moves along the time scale. Config: Push this button to add or delete trend tags. See How to make your own trend display above.
3.2.46 How to make your own bargraph display

The system allows you to create up to five different bargraph displays containing your own selection of tags. Each display can include up to six tags. Tags can be combined from different alarm groups. Do the following:
SELECT BARGR. DISPLAY
Push the SELECT BARGR. DISPLAY button. - In the lower left corner of the colour graphics display the text Select log number: is shown.
1-5
Note
The number should not previously have been used to create a bargraph display! - The texts ADD, DELETE and EXIT will be displayed at the top of the screen. 3 4 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to highlight ADD. Push ENTER. - The text Select group: will be displayed in the bottom left of the colour graphics display. 5 Push one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags from or enter the alarm group number. Push ENTER. - The tags in the selected alarm group are displayed on the right side of the colour graphics display. 7 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the tags you want .
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
115
Push ENTER to select it. - The tag is displayed on the left side of the colour graphics display. If the tag list fills more than one page use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between them. To select an other tag from the same alarm group go to 5. To select a tag from a different alarm group go to 3. Should you want to remove a tag from your list use the arrow buttons to highlight DELETE. Push ENTER. Use the arrow buttons to select the tag you want to remove.
9 10 11
12 13 14
Push ENTER. - The tag is removed from the list. 15 Use the arrow buttons to highlight EXIT. 16 Push ENTER. - Your bargraph display of selected tags will be displayed.
Figure 48 Typical bargraph display.

Explanation to the bargraph display
Selected bargraph tags: Up to six tags can be displayed simultaneously. These are displayed with their current value. To select tags see How to make your own trend display above.
116
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Tag number: The tag number for the selected tag. Scale: Bargraph scale - Bargraph high range: The maximum value for the scale. Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to select it and type in a new maximum value. - Bargraph low range: The minimum value for the scale. Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to select it and type in a new minimum value. Current value bar: The value of the tag displayed as a bargraph. Current value: The current value of the tag. The numbers are displayed in green when the value is inside the limits and red when outside. Limits bar: Displays the minimum and maximum alarm limits - if any. Maximum alarm limit: The bar is green above this limit and red below. Minimum alarm limit: The bar is red above this limit and green below. Config: Push this button to add or delete bargraph tags. See How to make your own bargraph display above.
3.2.47 How to change tag parameters for an analogue channel

This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogue measuring points.
GROUP DISPLAY
Push the GROUP DISPLAY button. - The text Select group: will be displayed in the bottom left of the colour graphics display.
Type in an alarm group number and push ENTER, or push one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags from. - The alarm group is displayed on the colour graphics display.
3
TAG DETAILS
Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select a tag. Push the TAG DETAILS button. - The parameters for that tag is displayed.
There are three buttons at the bottom of the window. Push them to display the following:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
117
Figure 49 Tag detail display. * Tag Details: Shows the normal tag details display. All parameters displayed here can be changed by the operator. Pushing the Offscan Enable stops checking this tag against alarm limits. Pushing the Offscan Disable starts checking this tag against alarm limits. Pushing Offscan Value allows you to to insert a simulated value when the tag is off scan. This may be used while waiting to replace a defective sensor. * Advanced Tag Details: Shows a full list of all tag details. All parameters displayed in bold characters can be changed by the user without a password. Use the Parameter Filter on the right side to reduce the number of parameters displayed. * Tag application: Lists other tags related to this tag. Only used for advanced applications and system commissioning. 6 7 To change a variable point to it ,and push the READ button on the operator control panel. Type in the new value and push OK.
- The display picture is updated and the new value is transferred to the Distributed Processing Unit and any other Remote Operator Station in the system. The following table explains what the the different parameters for analogue input tags are used for.
Parameter name Tag name Tag number Description Function Type Text Number Text Text Adjustable Yes No Yes No Function Unique code describing a tag Unique number describing a tag Description of a tag Short code describing the function of the tag
118
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Parameter name Value Distributed Processing Unit number Channel number Channel Type Operator Control Panel alarm group Bridge group Autolog Noonlog Eventlog Offscan Offscan value Inhibited by tag Access group Limit Alarm Low Low Limit Alarm Low Limit Alarm High Limit Alarm High High Limit Event Low Low Limit Event Low Limit Event High Limit Event High High Filter Time *) Dynamic Dead Band *) Counts Low *) Counts High *) Eng.Units Low *) Eng.Units High *) Alarm On Delay1
Type Number Number Number
Adjustable No No No
Function Measured value scaled to technical value and Filtered Unique number of the node Number of the channel connected Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Text Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
All tags in the system are divided into different groups. All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups. Included in the autolog list Included in the noonlog list Included in the eventlog list Included in the offscan log list Included in the offscan log list Tag to inhibit this channel Limited access id. to acknowledge this alarm Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Event limit Event limit Event limit Event limit Time in 100 milliseconds Report value dead band limit A/D minimum value A/D maximum value Instrument minimum value Instruments maximum value High/ Low delay in 1 second
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
119
Parameter name Alarm Off Delay1 Alarm On Delay2 Alarm Off Delay2 Inhibit On Delay Inhibit Off Delay
Type Number Number Number Number Number
Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Function High/ Low delay in 1 second HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second Inhibit delay in 1 second Inhibit delay in 1 second
Table 2 Analogue input channel parameters. *) Requires Eng.Unit change = 1 in System info. display.
3.2.48 How to change tag parameters for a digital channel

This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for digital measuring points.
GROUP DISPLAY
Push the GROUP DISPLAY button. - The text Select group: will be displayed in the bottom left of the colour graphics display.
Type in an alarm group number and push ENTER, or push one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags from. - The alarm group is displayed on the colour graphics display.
3
TAG DETAILS
Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select a tag. Push the TAG DETAILS button.
- The parameters for that tag is displayed. 5 Use the arrow buttons to select the parameter you wish to change and push enter. 6 7 Select for instance High-High alarm limit. Push ENTER.
- The text Enter new limit: will be displayed on the lower left side of the colour graphics display. 8 Enter a new limit. 9 Push ENTER. - The display picture is updated and the new value is transferred to the Distributed Processing Unit.
120
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
The following table explains what the the different parameters for digital input tags are used for.
Parameter Name Tag name Description Function State Distributed Processing Unit number Channel number Channel Type Operator Control Panel alarm group Bridge group Autolog Noonlog Eventlog Offscan Inhibited by tag Access group Enable Event on Open Enable Event on Closed Inhibit On Delay Inhibit Off Delay Alarm On Delay Alarm Off Delay Signal Cond. On Delay Signal Cond Off Delay Signal Cond Invert Number Number Number Number Number Number Text Number Yes/No Yes/No Number Number Number Number Number Number Yes/No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Type Text Text Text Text Number Number Adjustable No No No No No No Function Unique code describing a tag Description of a tag Short code describing the function of the tag Input status after time delay Unique number of the node Number of the channel connected Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled All tags in the system are divided into different groups. All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups. Included in the autolog list Included in the noonlog list Included in the eventlog list Included in the offscan log list Tag to inhibit this channel Limited access id. to acknowledge this alarm Enable/ disable event Enable/ disable event Inhibit delay in 1 second Inhibit delay in 1 second Delay in 1 second Delay in 1 second Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second Invert input status
Table 3 Digital input channel parameters.
3.2.49 How to change the Autolog

The Autolog function is used to print logs a set intervals.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
121
Altering autolog printing time

AUTO LOG CONFIG.
Push the AUTO LOG CONFIG. button.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to highlight the time,
Push ENTER. - The prompt Enter new time hh.mm: is displayed in the lower left of the display.
4 5
Type in the new time. Push ENTER. - The colour graphics display is updated with the new time.
M/S EAGLE KALDNES AUTO LOG Tagname AE001 AE002 FO001 FO001 LO001 LO001 ME001 ME002 ME003 ME004 ME005 Tag description STARTING AIR CHARGE AIR F.O. PRESS F.O. TEMP L.O. PRESS L.O. TEMP STARTING AIR CYL.1 LUBRICATION CYL.2 LUBRICATION CYL.3 LUBRICATION CYL.4 LUBRICATION NORCONTROL AUTOMATION A/S HULL NO: 10 93-12-27 12:16:58 Func Value LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP Eng.unit Alarm OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN DC2000 PAGE 1 Low Lim. High lim. ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( 18.00, , , , , , , , , , , ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
24.5 KG/CM2 OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN
Table 4 Typical example of an Auto log.

Deleting an autolog printing time
AUTO LOG CONFIG.
1 2
Push the AUTO LOG CONFIG button. Use the arrow buttons to highlight the start time to be deleted. Push ENTER. - The prompt Enter new time hh.mm: is displayed in the lower left of the display.
Push the SPACE button and then ENTER. - The selected start time is deleted.
122
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Starting and stopping Autolog

AUTO LOG CONFIG.
1 2 3
Push the AUTO LOG CONFIG button. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Autolog on/off. Push ENTER. - The prompt Autolog on/off (1-on, 0-off) is displayed in the lower left of the display.
A prompt will occur at the bottom left of the screen: on=1 off=0. Type in 1. Push ENTER to turn autolog on, or type in 0 and push ENTER to turn autolog off.
5 6
3.2.50 How to change Deviation parameters

How to change limits
This function is used to set limits for alarm blocking and deviation from corrected value such as used for main engine exhaust gas temperature.
DEVIATION PARAM. CONFIG.
Push the DEVIATION PARAM. CONFIG. button.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to highlight the parameter you want to change, for instance the limit for alarm blocking. Push ENTER. - The prompt Enter new value: is displayed in the lower left of the display.
4 5
Type in the new value. Push ENTER. - The new value is displayed. - Use this procedure to change any value on this display.
Note
When the average temperature is below a preset value, the deviation alarm is blocked.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
123
Figure 50 Typical Deviation parameter configuration display, your display may differ.
How to make profile correction
The average cylinder temperature is used as reference for deviations. For this reason it is necessary to correct the temperature of each cylinder, to get the same temperature in all cylinders as reference. This correction is done when running the engine at full load and can be done in two ways:
Automatic correction
1 2
Push the DEVIATION PARAM. CONFIG. button. Use the TRACKBALL and READ button to highlight the text Auto after Profile correction. Push ENTER. - All values found for Current deviation: are moved to Correction: and Current deviation: should read 0 for all cylinders.
Manual correction
1 2
Push the DEVIATION PARAM. CONFIG. button. Use the TRACKBALL and READ button to highlight the text Man after Profile correction.
124
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Use the TRACKBALL and READ button to highlight the value for each cylinder after the text Correction. Type in the value for each cylinder one by one. - The value for each cylinder under Current deviation: should read 0.
For information about Exhaust mean value tag items refer to page 224.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
125
3.3
Midi Operator Station

3.3.1 How to handle alarm events
When a process parameter enters an alarm state, the following takes place: - The buzzer is activated. - The alarm is indicated in red at the bottom of the display. - External alarm devices such as engine room horns are activated. - The last unacknowledged alarm is displayed in red at the bottom of the display. Do the following: 1 Push to turn any audible alarm off. - This turns off the buzzer and any external alarm devices.
ACK
Push the ACK button. - This acknowledges the alarm displayed at the bottom of the display (the last alarm). - This alarm text disappears.
ACK
3 4
Push the ACK button again to acknowledge the next to last alarm and so on untill no alarms are unacknowledged. Attend to the alarm situation.
3.3.2
How to display alarm history
Figure 51 Typical alarm history display.

MENU
Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the main menu is displayed.
126
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1 1
2 3 4
Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu. Push 1 to display the Alarm History. Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through all alarms a page at a time. Push Enter to display alarm details.
ENTER
3.3.3
MENU
Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the main menu is displayed. Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu. Push 2 to display the Alarm Summary. Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through all alarms a page at a time. Push Enter to display alarm details.
1 2
2 3 4
ENTER
3.3.4
How to display alarm group information
MENU
Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the main menu is displayed. Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu. Push 3 to display the Alarm History. Use the Navigator key to select an alarm group.
1 3
2 3 4
ENTER
5 6
Push Enter. Use the right and left side of the navigator key to display all available information for each tag group.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
127
ENTER
Push Enter to display alarm details.
3.3.5
How to set the keyboard and screen configuration
MENU
Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the main menu is displayed. Push 6 to display the Configuration Menu. Push 2 to display parameters for Keyboard and Screen. Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select the item you want to change.
6 2
2 3 4
Keyboard light and screen backlight
Use the Page down and Page up buttons to set the new value. Push Enter.
ENTER
Keyboard click
ENTER
7 8
Push Enter. Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select On or Off. Push Enter.
ENTER
3.3.6
How to change access level
An access control system limits the possibilities to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters or information. The status of this system is available as follows:
MENU
Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the main menu is displayed. Push 6 to display the Configuration menu.
128
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Push 1 to go to User Access. - The user access levels are displayed. * On: Indicates that access at this level is possible. * Off: Indicates that access at this level is not possible.
Note
Only one user access level can be selected at a time. The access control system is based on the use of passwords. The following access levels are available: - Monitoring: Only for viewing information. - User: Allows system control through the mimic pictures. Used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) components you normally dont have access to, such as for instance operating the power management from the cargo control room. - Superuser: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. Access automatically expire after 30 minutes. - Commissioning: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups, enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for each Remote Operator Station. Access automatically expire after 30 minutes.
Note Note
Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allows unauthorized access to vital system functions. If you try to make changes without having inserted the right password the system will automatically request it.
3.3.7
How to display information about DPUs, tags and tag details
Distributed processing units are often abbreviated DPUs.

MENU
Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the main menu is displayed. Push 2 to display the DPU Overview. Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through all DPUs a page at a time. Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to step through each DPU one at a time.
2 3
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
129
ENTER
For information about the tags for a particular DPU, select the DPU and push Enter. Use the right and left side of the navigator key to display all available information for each tag.
Tag details view

ENTER
Push Enter to display the parameters for a particular tag Tag Details View.
Figure 52 Tag details display.

Tag menu
MENU
8 9
Push Menu. The Tag Menu is displayed. - This menu allows you to display various information about each tag as follows: Push 1 to display the parameters for this particular tag - Tag Details View. Push 2 to display a mimic picture for this tag. Use the function keys to operate the the tag when available. Push 3 to display the Alarm status for this tag (if any).
10
11
12
3.3.8
How to change tag parameters
This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogue and digital measuring points.
MENU
Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the main menu is displayed.
130
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2 3
Push 2 to display the DPU Overview. Use the Page down and Page up buttons to select the distributed processing unit. Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the distributed processing unit you want. Push Enter. Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to display all available tags for the distributed processing unit. Push Enter to display the parameters for the selected tag.
ENTER
5 6
ENTER
7 8
Note
Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the parameter you want to change. - Colours are used to indicate if the current access level allows a parameter to be changed: * Grey parameter text: Can not be changed at current access level setting. * Black parameter text: Parameter can be changed. If you try to make changes without having inserted the right password the system will automatically request it.
ENTER
Push Enter. - A parameter entry window is displayed. Clear the existing value using the Clr button. Type in the new value. A red text indicates that you have typed in an illegal value. If you make an error push Esc to cancel the input.
CLR 0-9
10 11
Note
ESC
ENTER
12
Push Enter. - The new value is inserted. The display picture is updated and the new value is transferred to the Distributed Processing Unit and other Remote- and Midi Operator Stations in the system.
Analogue input tag parameters
The following table explains what the the different parameters for analogue input tags are used for.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
131
Parameter name Tag name Tag number Description Distributed Processing Unit number Channel number Channel Type Operator Control Panel alarm group Bridge group Autolog Noonlog Eventlog Offscan Offscan value Inhibited by tag Access group Limit Alarm Low Low Limit Alarm Low Limit Alarm High Limit Alarm High High Limit Event Low Low Limit Event Low Limit Event High Limit Event High High Filter Time Dynamic Dead Band Counts Low Counts High Eng.Units Low Eng.Units High Alarm On Delay1
Type Text Number Text Number Number
Adjustable No No Yes No No
Function Unique code describing a tag Unique number describing a tag Description of a tag Unique number of the node Number of the channel connected Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Text Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
All tags in the system are divided into different groups. All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups. Included in the autolog list Included in the noonlog list Included in the eventlog list Included in the offscan log list Included in the offscan log list Tag to inhibit this channel Limited access id. to acknowledge this alarm Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Event limit Event limit Event limit Event limit Time in 100 milliseconds Report value dead band limit A/D minimum value A/D maximum value Instrument minimum value Instruments maximum value High/ Low delay in 1 second
132
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Parameter name Alarm Off Delay1 Alarm On Delay2 Alarm Off Delay2 Inhibit On Delay Inhibit Off Delay
Type Number Number Number Number Number
Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Function High/ Low delay in 1 second HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second Inhibit delay in 1 second Inhibit delay in 1 second
Table 5 Analogue input channel parameters.

Digital input tag parameters
The following table explains what the the different parameters for digital input tags are used for.
Parameter Name Tag name Description Function State Distributed Processing Unit number Channel number Channel Type Operator Control Panel alarm group Bridge group Autolog Noonlog Eventlog Offscan Inhibited by tag Access group Enable Event on Open Enable Event on Closed Inhibit On Delay Number Number Number Number Number Number Text Number Yes/No Yes/No Number No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Type Text Text Text Text Number Number Adjustable No No No No No No Function Unique code describing a tag Description of a tag Short code describing the function of the tag Input status after time delay Unique number of the node Number of the channel connected Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled All tags in the system are divided into different groups. All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups. Included in the autolog list Included in the noonlog list Included in the eventlog list Included in the offscan log list Tag to inhibit this channel Limited access id. to acknowledge this alarm Enable/ disable event Enable/ disable event Inhibit delay in 1 second
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
133
Parameter Name Inhibit Off Delay Alarm On Delay Alarm Off Delay Signal Cond. On Delay Signal Cond Off Delay Signal Cond Invert
Type Number Number Number Number Number Yes/No
Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Function Inhibit delay in 1 second Delay in 1 second Delay in 1 second Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second Invert input status
Table 6 Digital input channel parameters.
3.3.9
How to change alarm limits
Refer to page 130 How to change parameters.
3.3.10 How to change alarm delay
Refer to page 130 How to change parameters.
134
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3.4
Local Operator Station

3.4.1 How to view alarms
Note
The following is only relevant when the Local Operator Station is sett up as a local alarm system. When an alarm occurs, the appointed Local Operator Station will display the alarm message, sound the buzzer and activate the horn. The display will look like this:
Alarm! |View| |Ignore|
Figure 53 Alarm display. 1 2 To silence the buzzer and horn, push SOUND OFF. To go back to what was previously displayed on the Local Operator Station push F4 (Ignore). To view the new alarm push F1 (View), this will take you to the top of the alarm history.
3.4.2
How to acknowledge alarms
- Unacknowledged alarms have an* in front of the alarm message. 1 In the Alarm History, Alarm Summary and Alarm Details an unacknowledged alarm event or tag can be acknowledged by selecting it and pushing ACK. The state will change from unacknowledged to acknowledged or back to normal if the alarm condition is no longer present.
3.4.3
1
How to turn the sound off
To silence the buzzer and horn push SOUND OFF.
3.4.4
How to display and interpret alarm history
The Alarm history can be reached in two ways:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
135
1 2 3
When the alarm display is shown push F1. Select Alarm History from the top menu. Push ENTER.
Wed May 12 10:01:51 2001 >*12 09:58:22 ME0010 *12.09:57:03 LO0034 12.09:40:21 Fo0044 ALARM HISTORY Alm IFH Alm Low Alm High
Figure 54 Typical alarm history display. - All Local Operator Stations that can connect to a Distributed Process Unit can view its alarm history and acknowledge alarms. - The alarm history is a list of the last 40 alarms for a specific Distributed Processing Unit. Alarms are sorted by time, the last alarm event at the top. - Line 1 of alarm history display shows current time and the text ALARM HISTORY. The following lines display alarm events. - The > symbol indicates that the alarm is selected. 4 Use SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN to move up and down in the list.
The DEFAULT button moves you to the top of the list. - Each alarm event line shows the following data:
>*12 09:58:22 ME0010

Tag name
Alm IFH
Alarm state * = Unacknowledged . = Acknowledged = Normal
Time of alarm event Day of month, hours : minutes : seconds
Event Alm = Alarm Ret = Return = No even
Alarm event type If no event for this tag the highest alarm state is displayed.
Figure 55 Alarm event interpretation.
136
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
An unacknowledged alarm, in focus, can be acknowledged by pushing the ACK button. Push MENU DOWN or ENTER to display alarm details.
3.4.5
How to display and interpret alarm details
Alarm details is used to provide more information about an alarm. 1 2 3 Select Alarm History as described above. Push ENTER. Select the alarm you want Alarm Details for using SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN.
Push ENTER.
Wed May 12 10:01:51 2001 >*12 09:58:22 ME0010 MAIN ENGINE BEARING TEMP 511.2 DEG.C IFH
ALARM HISTORY Alm IFH
Figure 56 Alarm details display. 5 An unacknowledged alarm is acknowledged by pushing ACK. SELECT UP, SELECT DOWN and DEFAULT buttons can be used to move up and down in the list. - If the alarm conditions has returned to normal the field is left blank. 7 Push MENU UP to return to Alarm History.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
137
Alarm state * = Unacknowledged . = Acknowledged = Normal
Time of day Day of month, hours : minutes : seconds
Event Alm = Alarm Ret = Return = No even
Alarm event type If no event for this tag the highest alarm state is displayed
Tag name
*12 09:58:22 ME0010 Alm IFH MAIN ENGINE BEARING TEMP 511.7 DEG.C IFH
TAG DESCRIPTION
CURRENT VALUE
ENGINEERING UNIT
HIGHEST ALARM STATE PRESENT
Figure 57 Alarm details interpretation.
3.4.6
1
From the top menu select Alarm Summary and push ENTER. - All Local Operator Stations that can connect to a Distributed Process Unit can view Alarm Summary and acknowledge alarms. - Alarm summary is a list of the last alarms or unacknowledged states. If the event have returned to normal the tag data is still displayed and the alarm field will contain the highest alarm present.
Wed May 12 10:01:51 2001 >*12 09:58:22 ME0010 *12.09:57:03 LO0034 12.09:40:21 Fo0044 ALARM SUMMARY Alm IFH Alm Low Alm High
Figure 58 Alarm summary display.
138
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3.5
Watch calling system

3.5.1 How to receive a call
- When you receive a call one of the watch location buttons are flashing. 1 Push SOUND OFF to acknowledge the call.
Figure 59 Buttons used to receive a call. Button texts will vary.
3.5.2
How to respond to alarms
When an alarm condition occur, the buzzer will sound and the alarm will be indicated on the Watch Bridge Unit. Do the following: 1 2 Push SOUND OFF. Read the alarm information on the display or the text next to the indicator. The ON DUTY engineer should also receive the alarm indicator and take appropriate action. After a time check that the alarm is no longer displayed on the Watch Bridge Unit after the alarm condition is corrected.
3.5.3
1
How to call the ON DUTY engineer
Push the CALL XXX (button texts will vary) button to notify the ON DUTY engineer to contact the bridge. - The LED indicator will flash until the ON DUTY engineer has acknowledged the call. Then it will be steady lit.
To terminated the call push the button again. Figure 60 Buttons used to call on duty engineer. Button texts will vary.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
139
3.5.4
1
How to transfer watch responsibility
Push WATCH RESPONSIBILITY to notify the other locations to accept the transfer of the watch responsibility. - The LED indicator will flash until the transfer is acknowledged. When the indicator is steady lit watch responsibility has been transferred.
Figure 61 Buttons used to transfer watch responsibility. Button texts may vary.
3.5.5
1 2
How to accept watch responsibility
- When the indicator for your location begins to flash, Push the button for your watch location. This acknowledges and accepts the transfer of watch responsibility to you.
3.6
Watch Bridge Unit
3.6.1
How to display alarm information when in off duty mode
- In Off Duty mode, all Watch Bridge Units can be defined as either active or passive This is done as part of the configuration in one of the Remote Operator Stations.
140
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Off Duty ACTIVE
- The panel will not sound alarms but all LED indicators and the display will show alarm conditions.
Off Duty PASSIVE
- The panel will not sound alarms. - LCD-type panels will display date and time information only. Pushing the controls on a LCD panel will display the alarms. - The LEDs on the alarm group-type panels will remain dark.
Figure 62 Watch Bridge Unit controls.
3.7
Watch Cabin Unit

3.7.1 How to display alarm information when duty mode
- In Off Duty mode, all Watch Cabin Units can be defined as either active or passive This is done as part of the configuration in one of the Remote Operator Stations.
Off Duty ACTIVE
- The panel will not sound alarms but all LED indicators and the display will show alarm conditions.
Off Duty PASSIVE
- The panel will not sound alarms. - LCD-type panels will display date and time information only. Pushing the controls on a LCD panel will display the alarms. - The LEDs on the alarm group-type panels will remain dark.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
141
3.8
Using ShipViewer
3.8.1 Main ShipViewer functions
ShipViewer has the following main functions: Counter display Alarm displays DPU displays Deviation displays Alarm group displays Alarm summery displays Alarm history displays Selected points display Selected trend display Selected bargraph display Mimic diagrams as found in the Remote Operator Station
3.8.2
Understanding the ShipViewer display
Overview
All ShipViewer functions are available through the menus bar and the most frequently used functions are also directly available through the toolbar buttons. These are further described in the following.
Menu bar
Toolbar buttons
Figure 63 ShipViewer menu and tool bar.

Toolbar buttons
Print screen Save image to disk Print preview Open image file
142
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Display version and build information Previous window Next window , for when you have used previous window Alarm summary display. Alarm history display Alarm group display. Running hours display. DPU display. Deviation display.
Colour codes for data displays
The channel data is colour coded as follows: - Green: The channel is in a normal state. Yellow: The channel is in an alarm state and acknowledged. - Red: The channel is in an alarm state and not acknowledged. - Cyan: The channel is in a high priority alarm state. - Blue: The channel is inhibited. - Grey: Not updated or invalid values. The background colour can be set to either dark blue or white. Dark blue is better to view some coloured texts, while white is better for printing. 1 In the menu bar select Settings and either select or clear No background color.
3.8.3
Explanation to the displays
Alarm summary display
The alarm summery display shows currently active alarm entries. Alarms acknowledged and returned to normal state are not displayed. The information is instantly updated as soon as something happens. Alarms are sorted by date and time.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
143
Alarm group display
The alarm group display shows all measuring points in the predefined alarm groups. These group where defined during commissioning of the DataChief C20. When selecting the alarm group display, a dialog containing all alarm groups appear on the screen. In this dialog all alarm groups with active alarms are indicated by a red dot. 1 2 Select an alarm group by pushing its button .
To go between alarm group view and group view push the Alarm Display/Group Display button (at the bottom) repeatedly. - The alarm and group displays are sorted by tag name.
Alarm history display
The alarm history display shows both active and alarms returned to normal. 1 Scroll through the pages using the Page Up and Page Down buttons on the keyboard. - The information is instantly updated as soon as something happens. Alarms are sorted by date and time.
Counter display
The counter display shows counters and lap counters for such components as pumps, generators, engines, etc. included in counter system on DataChief C20.
Distributed Processing Unit display
The Distributed Processing Unit (DPU) display shows all measuring points connected to each DPU. 1 Scroll through all units using the Page Up and Page Down buttons on the keyboard.
Deviation display
The deviation display shows exhaust deviation data for all engines having deviation calculations in the DataChief C20. 1 Scroll through all units using the Page Up and Page Down buttons on the keyboard.
144
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Selected points display
The selected points display shows one of up to five groups containing customer selected tags. Each display can include up to 20 tags. Note More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may be cascaded or tiled when required (See the Windows drop down menu). However when you want to configure a new display all other windows must be closed!
Display existing tag selection
1 2
In the Displays drop down menu select Selected points display. Select one of the five groups and push OK. - The selected points display is shown.
Make or alter tag selection
1 2
In the Displays drop down menu select Selected points display. Select one of the five groups and push OK.
- The selected points display is shown. 3 Push the Config button. - The Selected Points Configuration dialog is displayed. 4 Use the Select pull down menu to select system. 5 Select tags and push Add. - The selected points display can be selected from any of the different systems available. Select up to twenty tags. 6 Push OK.
Selected trend display
The selected trends display shows one of up to five groups containing customer selected tags. Each display can include up to eight tags. Note More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may be cascaded or tiled when required (See the Windows drop down menu). However when you want to configure a new display all other windows must be closed!
1 2
In the Displays drop down menu select Selected trend display. Select one of the five groups and push OK. - The selected trend display is shown.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
145
3 4 5 1 2
Push the Time button to select trend sample time. Push Stop to halt sampling and Start to restart it again. Select Grid to display a grid in the sampling window. In the Displays drop down menu select Selected trend display. Select one of the five groups and push OK.
- The selected trend display is shown. 3 Push the Config button. - The Selected Points Configuration dialog is displayed. 4 Select a system under Select. 5 Select tags and push Add. - The selected trend display can be selected from any of the different systems available. Select up to eight tags. 6 Push OK. 7 8 9 Push the Time button to select trend sample time. Push Stop to halt sampling and Start to restart it again. Select Grid to display a grid in the sampling window.
Selected bargraph display
The selected bargraph display shows one of up to five bargraph display pages containing customer selected tags. Each display can include up to twelve tags. Note More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may be cascaded or tiled when required (See the Windows drop down menu). However when you want to configure a new display all other windows must be closed!
1 2
In the Displays drop down menu select Selected bargraph display. Select one of the five groups and push OK. - The selected bargraph display is shown.
1 2
In the Displays drop down menu select Selected bargraph display. Select one of the five groups and push OK. - The selected bargraph display is shown.
146
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3 4 5
Push the Config button. - The Selected Points Configuration dialog is displayed. Use the Select pull down menu to select system. Select tags and push Add. - The selected points display can be selected from any of the different systems available. Select up to twelve tags.
Push OK.
Mimic diagrams
All mimic diagrams found in the Remote Operator Station are available through the ShipViewer. The number and design of these mimic diagrams are ship dependent. 1 2 Push the Mimics button on menu bar. Select mimic diagrams from the drop down list.
Figure 64 ShipViewer mimic selection.
3.8.4
How to print displayed information
Use the following procedure to print the information seen on the colour graphics display. 1 Select the No background color is in the Settings menu. - This reduces the amount of ink used when printing.
Figure 65 ShipViewer Settings menu.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
147
Push the print icon in the tool bar.
3.8.5
How to save ShipViewer images
Use the following procedure to save the image seen on the colour graphics display. 1 2 Push the save icon in the tool bar. - A standard file save dialog is displayed. Enter filename and a location and push Save. - Use any program for handling pictures or bit maps to view the file.
Figure 66 ShipViewer Save dialog.
3.8.6
How to view saved mimic diagram files
Use the following procedure to view previously saved image. 1 2 Push the open icon in the tool bar. - A standard file open dialog is displayed. Select filename and a location and push Open. - The file will be displayed using Paint - a Microsoft program for viewing, editing or creating bitmap images.
148
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 67 Typical open file window.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
149
4 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

4.1 Introduction
This chapter teaches you how to use the process control system of the DataChief C20. It is intended for personnel familiar with the Getting Started and Alarm and Monitoring sections of this manual. The following subjects are covered: - Remote Operator Station process control - Local Operator Station process control
4.2
About the process control system

The following describes the DataChief C20 process control system. It can control the following types of equipment: Pumps Fans Compressors Valves It includes: PID controllers
150
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
4.3

4.3.1 How to operate a pump starter
Pump starter functions
To control pumps the following functions and features are available: Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different directions. Alarm reporting for start and stop failure. Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded. Auto & manual control. Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout. Blocking from operation when Local switch is active or during blackout. Automatic shut down. Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of starting, running and stopping.
Pump starter types
The following types of pumps can be operated: Single speed: One speed control in one direction. Two speed: Two speed in the same direction. Two directional: One speed in two directions. All speed: Two speed in two directions. Single acting: One speed with steady relay control.
Pump symbols
Different pump symbols are used to indicate different types of pumps. Figure 68 One way, one speed pump. Figure 69 One way, two speed pump at low speed. Figure 70 One way, two speed pump at high speed. Figure 71 Two way, one speed pump going forward.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
151
Figure 72 Two way, one speed pump going in reverse. Figure 73 Two way, two speed pump going forward at low speed. Figure 74 Two way, two speed pump going forward at high speed. Figure 75 Two way, two speed pump going in reverse at low speed. Figure 76 Two way, two speed pump going in reverse at high speed.
Pump symbol colours
Pump symbols have colours according to the state they are in:
Arrow outline colour
- Green: Running - Grey: Stopped

Arrow fill colour
For two-speed pumps only: - Arrow fill green: Full speed - Arrow outline green: Low speed
Circle colour
Green: Running and remote Grey: Stopped and remote Blue: Blocked Red: Alarm White: Local - not ready Yellow: Standby
Parameters
Timeout: Time out for start and stop commands. Wait change direction: Wait time when changing speed direction. Pulse on: Pulse duration for start and stop commands. Blackout restart time: The time the equipment is blocked from auto restarting after a blackout.
152
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Stopped time: Stand still time when changing speed with stop pulse
Alarm and event enable
Parameters for enabling and disabling alarms and events are available. Some alarms must be enabled at all times due to classification society requirements. Start fail and trip alarms are among these. The following conditions will result in alarms, and the starter will be set to manual: Trip Start failure Stop failure Started without commanded
Modes
The starter can be operated in two different modes; auto and manual. - Auto: A unit can be automatically started and stopped. - Manual: Only manual start and stop is possible. Restart after blackout applies to both auto and manual modes. The function is activated when the timer is set to a value larger than zero, and the blackout detector is referred to by the tag reference. The shut down and start block functions are active both in auto and manual modes.
Single acting control
A relay is used to start and stop the controlled unit. The relay is closed as long as the unit is meant to be running, and opened when the unit is meant to be stopped. This functionality applies to one way, one speed units only. If the the controlled unit does not include a sensor to know if it it running, the starter will generate the feedback signal internally. In this way, the event information sent from the starter includes the current running information.
Blackout
Some equipment starters (provided by some manufacturers) have the local/remote switch connected serially with the power failure switch. On a blackout, the starter will lose the remote signal. It is important that the starter detects the blackout before it is set to local, and that the remote signal is back before the starter receives recover from blackout. To solve this set the delay to off at the running and remote feedback, and the delay to on for the system blackout signal.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
153
Actual blackout System blackout Running feedback Remote feedback Recover
Figure 77 Blackout sequence as described above.

How to start one way one speed pumps
1 2 3
Select the mimic display showing the pump. Move the cursor over the pump you want to start. Push READ. - The pump is selected. - The circle around the pump starts flashing.
Push ACTIVATE/START - The pump symbol turns green. - The pump status changes to Running.
How to stop one way one speed pumps
1 2 3
Select the mimic display showing the pump. Move the cursor over the pump you want to stop. Push READ. - The pump is selected. - The circle around the pump starts flashing.
Push DEACTIVATE/STOP. - The pump symbol turns grey. - The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL,.
How to operate two way and to speed pumps
1 2 3
Select the mimic display showing the pump. Move the cursor over the pump you want to operate. Push READ. - The circle around the pump starts flashing. - Dependent on the pump type one of the following windows is displayed:
154
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 78 Menu for two speed pump
Figure 79 Menu for two way pump
Figure 80 Menu for two speed, two way pump. Actual text may differ.
To start and stop
4 5
Move the cursor over the Start or Stop button. Push READ. - The valve symbol changes colour to green for start, or grey for stop.
To change speed or direction
6 7 8 9 Note
Move the cursor over the corresponding option button. Push READ. Move the cursor over the Start button. Push READ.
When changing direction the pump will stop, and start in the reverse direction after a delay. The delay is configurable.
How to reset pumps
The pump logic must be reset when the pump has tripped or as the result of a start failure.
ALARM ACK
1 2 3
Push Alarm Ack to acknowledge the alarm Correct the problem. Select the mimic display showing the pump.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
155
Move the cursor to the symbol for the pump you want to reset. Push READ. - The pump is selected. - The circle around the pump starts flashing.
RESET
Push RESET. - The circle around the pump symbol changes from red to grey.
Standby pump systems
A standby system includes a pump symbol for each standby pump. The priority number defines which pump will start first - lowest number first. The running pump need not have the lowest number. When two pumps have the same standby number, both will start simultaneously. If no pump is running, the pump with the lowest number will start at group start.
AUTO
AUTO (1) Pressure indicator Auto or manual modes Pump symbol
STANDBY (2) Priority
Figure 81 Symbol for standby pump system.

Standby system auto and manual modes
The standby system can be set to one of two modes: - Auto: For normal standby system operation from the Remote Operator Station. - Manual: The standby pump system is disabled. Pumps can be manually operated. 1
AUTO
Select the mimic display showing the standby pumps. Move the cursor over the standby pumps controller symbol. Push READ. - The standby pump controller is selected. - The text background starts flashing.
2 3
156
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
AUTO MAN
Push Auto/man. - The controller changes between auto and manual. The text background changes between green and grey. * Green - auto * Grey - manual
How to start a standby pump system
To operate a pump system i standby mode the pump controller and each of the pumps must be set to auto. Then one of the pumps must be started. 1
MANUAL
2 3
AUTO MAN
Push Auto/man. - The text background turns green and the text changes to Auto.
AUTO
5 6
Move the cursor over each of the pumps in the pump system. Push READ. - The pump is selected. - The circle around the pump starts flashing.
AUTO MAN
Push Auto/man.
- The pump status changes to auto. 8 When all pumps are set to auto, move the cursor over the pump you want to start. 9 Push ACTIVATE/START - The pump symbol turns green. - The pump status changes to Running, auto.
How to stop a standby pump system
To take a pump system out of standby mode set the pump controller to manual and stop the running pump if required.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
157
1
AUTO
2 3
AUTO MAN
Push Auto/man. - The text background turns grey. - The controller is set to manual.
MANUAL
If you want to stop the running pump, move the cursor over it. Push READ. - The pump is selected. - The circle around the pump starts flashing.
Push DEACTIVATE/STOP - The pump symbol turns grey. - The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL., manual.
How to take a pump out of the standby system
To take a pump out of the standby system set the pumps to manual. 1 2 3 Select the mimic display showing the standby pumps. Move the cursor over the pump. Push READ. - The pump is selected. - The circle around the pump starts flashing.
AUTO MAN
Push Auto/man. - The pump status changes to manual.
If you need to stop the pump, push DEACTIVATE/STOP - The pump symbol turns grey. - The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL., manual.
158
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
How to put a pump back into the standby system
To put a pump into the standby system set the pumps to auto. 1 2 3 Select the mimic display showing the standby pumps. Move the cursor over the pump. Push READ. - The pump is selected. - The circle around the pump starts flashing.
AUTO MAN
Push Auto/man. - The pump status changes to auto.
How to handle a failure to a running pump
When a pump fails it is detected through a drop in pressure. - The pressure indicator turns yellow indicating a drop in pressure. - The 1.st standby pump starts. - The failing pump goes to manual. It will keep on running or stop dependent on how the system is configured.
ALARM ACK
1 2
Push Alarm Ack to acknowledge the alarm. Correct the problem.
How to set standby priority
A standby pump system will normally consist of two or three pumps. 1 2 Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as master. Push READ. - The pump is selected. - The circle around the pump starts flashing. 3
MASTER
Push Master. - The text changes to standby (1). Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as first standby. Push READ. - The pump is selected. The circle around the pump starts flashing.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
159
1.ST STAND BY
3 1
Push 1.st standby. - The text changes to standby (2). Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as next standby. Push READ. - The pump is selected. - The circle around the pump starts flashing.
NEXT STAND BY
Push Next standby. - The text changes to standby (3).
4.3.2
How to operate a fan starter
Fan starter functions
To control fans the following functions and features are available: Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different directions. Alarm reporting for start and stop failure. Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded. Auto & manual control. Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout. Blocking from operation when Local switch or blackout. Automatic shut down. Optional time stamp on every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of starting, running and stopping.
Fan starter types
The following types of starters can be operated: Single speed: One speed control in one direction. Two speed: Two speed in one direction. Two directional: One speed in two directions. All speed: Two speed in two directions. Single acting: One speed with steady relay control.
Fan symbols
Different fan symbols are used to indicate different types of fans.
160
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 82 One way, one speed fan. Figure 83 One way, two speed fan at low speed. Figure 84 One way, two speed fan at high speed. Figure 85 Two way, one speed fan going forward. Figure 86 Two way, one speed fan going in reverse. Figure 87 Two way, two speed fan going forward at low speed. Figure 88 Two way, two speed fan going forward at high speed. Figure 89 Two way, two speed fan going in reverse at low speed. Figure 90 Two way, two speed fan going in reverse at high speed.
Fan symbol colours Arrow outline colour

Arrow fill colour
For two-speed fans only! - Shape filled green: Full speed - Shape outline green: Low speed
Circle colour
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
161
How to start a fan
1 2 3
Select the mimic display showing the fan. Move the cursor over the fan. Push READ. - The fan is selected. - The circle around the fan starts flashing. Push ACTIVATE/START - The fan symbol turns green. Select the mimic display showing the fan. Move the cursor over the fan. Push READ. - The fan is selected. - The circle around the fan starts flashing. Push DEACTIVATE/STOP - The fan symbol turns grey.
How to stop a fan
1 2 3
How to reset a fan
The fan logic must be reset when a fan has tripped or as the result of a start failure.
ALARM ACK
1 2 3 4 5
Push Alarm Ack to acknowledge the alarm. Correct the problem, if any. Select the mimic display showing the fan. Move the cursor to the symbol for the fan you want to reset. Push READ. - The fan is selected. The circle around the fan starts flashing. Push RESET. - The circle around the fan symbol changes from red to grey.
6
RESET
4.3.3
How to operate a compressor
The main purpose of the compressor starter is to control the compressors in a compressed air system. The compressor starter provides automatic start on low pressure and stop on high pressure. The compressed air system may include one or more compressors with analogue or binary pressure sensors. The figure describes a compressor system with one common analogue pressure signal.
162
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
LEADER
FOLLOVER
AIR RESERVOIR
Figure 91 A 2-compressor system with common pressure sensor. The compressor starter monitors pressure and running signals. Compressors are started if the pressure is lower than the set limit and stopped if it is higher. The following functions are handled:
Compressor starter functions
To control compressor the following functions and features are available: Alarm reporting for start and stop failure. Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded. Auto & manual control. Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout. Blocking from operation when Local switch is active or during blackout. Automatic shut down. Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of starting, running and stopping.
Compressor control types
Analogue pressure 1: One analogue pressure. Analogue pressure 2: Two analogue pressures. Binary pressure with hysteresis: Pressure switches with built in hysteresis. Binary pressure without hysteresis: Separate pressure switches for start and stop.
Compressor symbols
Compressors have the following symbol. Figure 92 Compressor symbol.

Compressor symbol colours
Compressor symbols have colours according to the state they are in.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
163
Arrow colour

Circle colour
Leader follower compressor system
A leader follower compressor system includes a symbol for each compressor. The symbol is described above.
AUTO
Auto or manual modes Compressor symbol
LEADER
FOLLOVER
Figure 93 Leader follower compressor system.

Priorities
For automatic operation, the compressor starter must be set to auto mode. The compressor starter assigns different start and stop priorities as follows: Leader 1.st follower 2.nd follower 3.rd follower A compressor can only have one priority at a time. The priority defines in which order the compressors will start and stop. The start setting for the 1.st follower must be lower or equal to the leader start setting and the stop setting for the first follower must be lower or equal to the leader stop setting. All followers are stopped when the leader stop setting is reached. For systems with analogue pressure sensors all followers are stopped when reaching the alarm high high limit.
164
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Pressure tags
Command timeout: The time the starter will wait before signalling command timeout. Pressure filter: The length of time the pressure may stay below the start limit before the compressor is started. Wait pressure at start: When a compressor is starting, a new compressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above the start limit when this timer has expired. Blackout recover: The time the compressors are blocked from auto restarting after a blackout.
Start/stop conditions
Start and stop conditions are adjustable by changing parameters.

Start
Systems using both binary and analogue pressure sensors have separate start settings for each priority. Start conditions are: Pressure lower than the start limit. When a compressor is starting, a new compressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above the start limit when a set time has expired.
Stop
The stop limit can be the same for all compressors, or individual. When analogue pressure sensors are used, each priority has separate stop settings. When binary pressure sensors are used, separate sensors can be used to define the stop limit for each priority. A common stop sensor can also be used. All priorities are stopped by the stop leader setting. Stop conditions are: Pressure higher than the stop limit. Stop leader signal is active. High-high pressure.
Auto
Two modes exist, auto and manual. Select auto mode to set the compressor automation functionality in operation. Auto mode operation requires that the starter is not blocked, or in any way disabled from operating. The following gives different examples for start and stop condition:
Leader control
The leader compressor has its own start and stop limits.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
165
pressure Stop leader
Start leader time
Figure 94 Leader start stop limits.

Start follower on pressure drop
Each priority has its own start and stop settings. A compressor set to a priority will start when the pressure lowers below its start setting, and stop when the pressure rises above its stop setting.
pressure Stop leader Stop first follower Start leader Start first follower Start leader & first follower time Stop first follower & leader
Figure 95 Start 1.st follower on pressure setting.

pressure Common stop setting Start leader Start first follower Start second follower Start leader & two followers time Stop compressors
Figure 96 Start two followers on pressure setting.

Start follower after a time delay
The 1.st follower can start on its own pressure setting, or a time delay after a start condition for the leader compressor. The 2.nd and 3.rd followers will start in similar ways. There is no delayed start on the start conditions for the topping up compressor.
pressure start leader start delay = T4 time Start leader Start follower on timer
Figure 97 Start follower after a time delay - principle diagram.
166
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
In the illustration below, the third follower will start after a time delay. The timer is started when the 2.nd follower meets its start conditions. If the pressure falls below third followers start conditions before the timer has expired, the third follower will start immediately.
pressure Stop leader Stop first follower Stop second follower Stop second follower Start leader Start first follower Start second follower Start third follower Start leader & two followers Start third follower Stop followers & leader Start delay
time
Figure 98 Start followers after a time delay. The followers are started on timer. The timer is started when the leader has start conditions. If the first and second compressor does not start on their own start settings, the third follower is started 3 times; start delay after the leader had its start condition.
Stop leader Stop first follower Stop second follower Stop third follower Start leader Start timer third follower = 3dT pressure dT = Start delay
2dT Start first follower dT Start second follower Start third follower Start leader & two followers Start first follower
time Start third follower stop
Figure 99 Follower start timers. In the illustration below, the followers are started after time delays. The delay starts when the leader meets its start conditions. If the first follower meets it own start condition (before the delay has expired), the second and third followers will reset their timers, and count the time from this event.
pressure Common stop setting Start third timer = 3dT (interrupted) Start leader Start first follower Start second follower Start third follower dT Start leader Start first Start second Start third stop Start 2.nd timer = 2dT (int.) Start 2.nd = dT time Start third timer = 2dT dT = Start delay
Figure 100 Interrupted start timer

Built in hysteresis
This function operates using two pressure switches:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
167
The leader will start and stop based on the high pressure switch. The follower will start and stop in correspondence with the state of the low pressure switch.
pressure high low time start leader start follower stop start follower stop follower stop leader
Figure 101 Built in hysteresis. By adjusting the pressure switches differently, the two compressors will function as a pair where one starts before the other.
Two analogue pressures
In two reservoir systems the compressors are started when one the pressure sensors indicate below the start limit. The compressors are stopped when both of the pressure sensors increase above the stop limit.
pressure stop leader start leader Start leader Stop leader Start leader
B A
Figure 102 Two analogue pressures

Overhaul function
Two reservoir system have an overhaul function. That is when one of the reservoirs is disabled from being part of the auto start and stop logic. There are two ways of setting a reservoir to overhaul: Set the pressure sensors belonging to the reservoir to off scan. The sensor is not included when checking the auto start and stop limits for the compressors. Set a button in the mimic or physical switch on the equipment to out of service. Different configurations are available as required by the customer.
168
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
How to set auto and manual modes
A leader follower compressor system can be set to one of two modes: - Auto: For normal leader follower system operation from the Remote Operator Station. - Manual: The leader follower system can only be operated locally from the starter cabinet. 1 Select the mimic display showing the leader follower compressor system.
AUTO
Move the cursor over the leader follower compressor auto/manual square where you want to change mode. Push READ. - The compressor controller is selected. The text background starts flashing.
AUTO MAN
Push Auto/man. - The controller changes between auto and manual. The text background changes between green and grey. * Green - auto * Grey - manual
How to start a leader follower compressor system
To operate a leader follower compressor system in standby mode the compressor controller and each of the compressors must be set to auto. Then one of the compressors must be started. Note When the pressure is higher than the stop limit, the compressor will not start. 1 Select the mimic display showing the leader follower compressor system. Move the cursor over the auto/manual controller symbol. Push READ. - The controller is selected. - The text background starts flashing.
AUTO MAN
MANUAL
2 3
Push Auto/man - The text background turns green and the text changes to auto.
AUTO
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
169
Move the cursor over each of the compressors in the leader follower system.. Push READ. - The compressor is selected. - The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
AUTO MAN
Push Auto/man. - The compressor status changes to auto. 8 Do this for each of the compressors. 9 When all compressors are set to auto, move the cursor to the compressor you want to start. 10 Push READ. - The compressor is selected. - The circle around the compressor starts flashing. Push ACTIVATE/START to to start the compressor. Push Auto/man. - The button status changes to Running, remote CTRL., auto.
11 12
How to stop a leader follower compressor system
To take a leader follower pump system out of standby mode, set the compressor controller to manual and stop the running compressor if required. 1 Select the mimic display showing the leader follower compressor system.
AUTO
2 3
Move the cursor over the controller symbol Push READ. - The controller is selected. - The text background starts flashing. Push Auto/man.
AUTO MAN
MANUAL
- The controller is set to manual. 5 If you want to stop the running compressor, move the cursor over it. 6 Push READ. - The compressor is selected. - The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
170
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Push DEACTIVATE/STOP - The compressor symbol turns grey. - The compressor status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL., manual.
How to set leader follower priority
A standby compressor system will normally consist of two or three compressors. 1 2 Select the mimic display showing the leader follower compressor system. Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as leader. Push READ. - The compressor is selected. - The circle around the compressor starts flashing. 4
MASTER
Push Master.
- The text changes to leader. 5 Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as the first follower. 6 Push READ. - The compressor is selected. - The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
1.ST STAND BY
Push 1.st standby.
- The text changes to follower. 1 Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as the second follower. 2 Push READ. - The compressor is selected. - The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
NEXT STAND BY
Push Next standby. - The text changes to follower (2).
How to reset compressors
The compressor logic must be reset when the compressor has tripped or as the result of a start failure.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
171
ALARM ACK
1 2 3 4
Push Alarm ack to acknowledge the alarm. Correct the problem. Select the mimic display showing the compressor . Move the cursor to the symbol for the compressor you want to reset. Push READ. - The compressor is selected. - The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
RESET
Push RESET. - The circle around the compressor symbol changes from red to grey.
4.3.4
How to open or close valves
Valve control functions
The following functions and features are available: Monitoring of the controlled valve Pulse or analogue control of valves with analogue feedback Blocking from opening Blocking from closing Blocking from operation (local control) Deviation monitoring Update alarm status Update event status Optional time stamp on every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of positioning
Valve control types
The valve control can operate the following types of configurations:

On-off valves
Single acting: One relay for control. Single acting with one feedback: One relay for control and one binary feedback. Single acting with two feedbacks: One relay for control and two binary feedbacks.
172
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Single acting with no feedback: No feedback, only single acting control. Double acting: Two relays for control. Double acting with one feedback: Two relays for control and one binary feedback. Double acting with two feedbacks: Two relays for control and two binary feedbacks. Double acting with no feedback: No feedback, only double acting control.
Analogue positioning valves
Analogue out: Step-less positioning. Analogue out with analogue feedback: Step-less control with analogue feedback. Double acting positioning: Pulsed positioning. Double acting with analogue feedback: Pulsed positioning with analogue valve feedback. Double acting with one analogue feedback and two binary feedbacks: Pulsed positioning with one analogue valve feedback and two binary end feedbacks.
Monitoring
Monitoring is used when only binary feedbacks are interfaced to the positioner, and no relay or other control is provided. One feedback: No control, one binary feedbacks. Two feedbacks: No control, two binary feedbacks.
Valve symbols
Different valve symbols are used to indicate different types of valves. Figure 103 Valve symbol. Figure 104 Three way valve symbol.
Valve symbol colours
Valve symbols have colours according to the state they are in.
Single and double acting valves
Green: Open Grey: Closed Yellow: Intermediate (opening or closing) Blue: Blocked Red: Alarm White: Local - not ready
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
173
Throttle valves
- Green: Feedback at setpoint - Grey: Closed/stopped - Yellow: Feedback outside deadband - Blue: Blocked - Red: Alarm - White: Local - not ready Throttle valves have set points between 0 and 100 %. Note As a default, valves will give an alarm on timeout - when not reaching the end position.
How to open on-off valves
1 2
Select the mimic display showing the valve. Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate. Push READ. - The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected. - Tag, tag description and the current status of the valve is displayed at the bottom left of the display.
Push ACTIVATE/START. - The current status and the new command is displayed. - The symbol colour changes to green.
How to close on-off valves
1 2
Select the mimic display showing the valve. Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate. Push READ. - The valve is selected. Tag, tag description and the current state of the valve is displayed at the bottom left of the display. - The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected.
Push DEACTIVATE/ STOP. - The current status and new the new command is displayed. - The symbol colour changes to grey.
How to operate analogue valves
Select the mimic display showing the valve.
174
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate.
Push READ. - The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected. - The text Enter new setpoint (0.0-100.0 %): is displayed. * 0% - Closed * 100% - Open 4 Type in the new setpoint. 5 Push Enter. - The valve setpoint is changed. Select the mimic display showing the valve. Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate. Push READ. - The equipment is selected. - The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected. - The following window is displayed:
How to operate throttle valves
1 2
Figure 105 Menu for analogue valves.

Open valve to 100%
To open the valve to 100% use the trackball to point to the open button and push Read. - The status changes, first to opening then to opened.
Close valve to 0%
To close the valve to 0% use the trackball to point to the close button and push Read. - The status changes, first to closing then to closed. To set the setpoint to a value between 0 and 100% use the trackball to point to the Throttle mode check box and push Read. - The menu buttons changes to increase and decrease.
Throttle mode
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
175
Figure 106 Menu for analogue valves in throttle mode. 7 8 9 10 Move the cursor over the Increase or Decrease button. Push READ. Type in the new setpoint value. Push ENTER. - The setpoint changes.
How to reset valves
Resetting of valves is required on timeout. 1 2 Select the mimic display showing the valve. Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to reset. Push READ. - The valve is selected. Tag, tag description and the current status of the valve is displayed at the bottom left of the display. - The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected.
RESET
Push RESET. - The symbol colour changes to grey.
4.3.5
How to operate a PID controller
PID controller symbol
The PID controller keeps a process signal at a pre-defined value. The controller is used for temperature controlled valves, pressure controlled valves, frequency controlled pumps etc.
176
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Valve feedback Process setpoint Process Process feedback
Figure 107 PID controller. The controller can operate in two modes: * Active (on): This is the normal PID controller mode. The controller operates when active. * Deactive (off). The PID controller does not control the process. If the controller operates on an actuator, manual valve positioning is possible.
FW COOLING
100 ACTIVE TEMP. 62 Deg. C Status Setp. 60 Deg. C 0 100%
Process feedback Process setpoint Alarm status indicator PID controller setpoint Actual value Actuator
Actuator Setp. 28 FB 32
Actuator setpoint, used used when control is deactive Actuator feedback Indicator green when active, grey when deactive
Figure 108 PID controller symbol.

PID controller symbol colours
Green: Active Blue: Blocked or configuration fail Grey: Deactive Red: Alarm Select the mimic display showing the PID controller.
To select a PID controller
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
177
Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller you want to operate. Push READ. - The PID controller is selected. A flashing yellow square is displayed around the controller. - Tag, tag description and the current state of the PID controller is displayed at the bottom left of the display.
ME HFO TEMP
200 ACTIVE TEMP.
123
Status Setp. 0 0
120
Deg. C
Deg. C 100%
Actuator Setp. 67 Feedb. 67
Figure 109 Symbol for an active PID controller.

To activate the controller
Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller you want to operate and push READ. Push ACTIVATE/START. - The Active circle turns green. The controller setpoint is shown in the Setp. field. Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and a bargraph. A setpoint command is sent to the controller.
To enter a new setpoint push READ.
- The prompt ACT., DEACT. or Enter New PROCESS setpoint is displayed. 4 Type in the new value using the numeric keyboard. 5 Push ENTER. - The new process setpoint is displayed. The PID controller adjusts the actuator to make the process feedback equal to the new setpoint.
To deactivate the controller
Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller you want to operate and push READ.
178
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Push DEACTIVATE/STOP. - The Active circle turns grey. The controller setpoint is no longer displayed, but showing N/A in the Setp. field. Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and a bargraph. A setpoint command is sent to the positioner.
To enter a new actuator setpoint push READ. - The prompt ACT., DEACT. or Enter New PROCESS setpoint is displayed.
4 5 Note
Type in the new value using the numeric keyboard. Push ENTER. - The new actuator setpoint is displayed.
You must manually adjust the actuator to make the process feedback equal to the required value.
ME HFO TEMP
200 ACTIVE TEMP.
123
Status Setp. 0 0
N/A
Deg. C
Deg. C 100%
Actuator Setp. 67 Feedb. 67
Figure 110 Symbol for a PID controller that is not active.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
179
4.4
Local Operator Station

4.4.1 How to operate pumps or fans from the Local Operator Station
To operate pumps or fans from the Local Operator Station do the following: 1 The Local Operator Station must be physically connected to the same CAN segment as the DPU controlling the pump or fan. When connected push MENU UP. - You should now see the LOS top menu and a list of DPUs connected to the CAN segment. 3 Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons to select the DPU controlling the pump or fan. The selected DPU must be displayed in line two. Push MENU DOWN to select it. - Observe the DPU Top Menu. 5 Push MENU DOWN to select the Tag Overview Menu. - Observe the DPU Tag Overview display. - Channel numbers are indicated on the left side. - Function tag channels for pumps and fans are organised as follows:
DPU module RAi-16 RAi-32 RIO-C1 RIO-C2 dPSC Function tag channels for starters, valves etc. 33 - 47 33 - 47 33 - 47 33 - 47 1 - 99
Select the function tag channel for the pump or fan you want to operate using the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons. Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between Tag Description and Tag Name.
180
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
33
Channel number
AM132S
Tag name
Ready for Start

Tag status
Push MENU DOWN to go to the Tag Details Starter display. - Observe the Tag Details Starter display. - In this display you can change database parameters for this tag. (Described elsewhere). - To be able to control pumps or fans the system requires a password.
9 10 11 12 13
Push F1 to select the Common Menu. Push SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN to select the Password parameter. Enter the Password. (Described elsewhere). Push ENTER. If not already selected, push F4 to select the Application Menu. Push and hold MENU DOWN and at the same time push F2. - Observe the Commands for Starter Menu. - Available commands for the function tag are displayed.
14
15
Use the SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN buttons to see all available commands. - The first set of commands are: * F1 * F2 * F3 * F4 Start LF (low forward, normal start) Start HF (high forward) Start LR (low reverse) Start HR (high reverse)
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
181
Commands for Starter DPU 032/01.05.24 Start commands : 2 / 120 33 AM132S Ready for start |Start LF |Start HF |Start LR |Start HR
Figure 111 Typical control display starter, first set. - The second set of commands are: * F1 * F2 * F3 * F4 Stop Reset Auto Semi Auto
Commands for Starter DPU 032/01.05.24 Stop & aux commands : 2 / 120 33 AM132S Ready for start |Stop |Reset |Auto |Semi Auto
Figure 112 Typical control display starter, second set. - The meaning of lamp indication for the function keys are: * Fixed light - function active * Flashing - function activating * Dark - not active 16 Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between the next and previous function tag at the same operational level. To exit push MENU UP several times until you reach the Tag Overview display. Push F1 to disconnect the DPU. - The DPU list is displayed.
17
18
182
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
4.4.2
How to operate valves from the Local Operator Station
To operate valves from the Local Operator Station do the following: 1 The Local Operator Station must be physically connected to the same CAN segment as the DPU controlling the valve. When connected push MENU UP. - You should now see the LOS top menu and a list of DPUs connected to the CAN segment. 3 Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons to select the DPU controlling the valve. The selected DPU must be displayed in line two. Push MENU DOWN to select it. - Observe the DPU Top Menu. 5 Push MENU DOWN to go to the Tag Overview Menu. - Observe the DPU Tag Overview display. - Channel numbers are indicated on the left side. - Function tag channels for valves are organised as follows:
DPU module RAi-16 RAi-32 RIO-C1 RIO-C2 dPSC Function tag channels for starters, valves etc. 33 - 47 33 - 47 33 - 47 33 - 47 1 - 99
Select the function tag channel for the valve you want to operate using the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons.
36 NM 13P
Channel number Tag name
Closed
Tag status
AUTO
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
183
Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between Tag Description and Tag Name. Push MENU DOWN to go to the Tag Details Positioner display. - Observe the Tag Details Positioner display. - In this display you can change database parameters for this tag. (Described elsewhere). - To be able to control valves the system requires a password.
9 10 11 12 13
Push F1 to select the Common Menu. Push SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN to select the Password parameter. Enter the Password. (Described elsewhere). Push ENTER. If not already selected push F4 to select the Application Menu. Push and hold MENU DOWN and at the same time push F2. - Observe the commands for the Positioner Menu. - Available commands for the function tag are displayed.
14
15
Use the SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN buttons to see all available commands. - The first set of commands are: * F1 Open * F2 Close * F3 Reset
Commands for Positioner DPU 106/02.11.27 Adjust Setpoint 0.0 36 NM 64P Closed Auto |Open |Close |Reset |
Figure 113 Typical control display for positioner, first set. - The second set of commands are: * F1 Thr.Open (throttle open)
184
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
* F2 * F3 * F4
Thr.Close (throttle close) Auto Semi Auto
Commands for Positioner DPU 106/02.11.27 Not used for analog: 2 / 120 R 36 NM 64P Closed Auto |Thr.Open |Thr.Close| Auto |Semi Auto
Figure 114 Typical control display for positioner, second set. - The meaning of lamp indication for the function keys are: * Fixed light - function active * Flashing - function activating * Dark - not active. 16 Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between the next and previous valve function tag at the same operational level. To exit push MENU UP several times until you reach the Tag Overview display. Push F1 to disconnect the DPU. - The DPU list is displayed.
17
18
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
185
5 POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

5.1 Introduction
This chapter teaches you how to use the power management system of the DataChief C20. It is intended for personnel familiar with the Getting Started and Alarm and Monitoring sections of this manual. The following subjects are covered: - About the power management system - Remote Operator Station process control - Midi Operator Station process control
186
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
5.2
About the power management system

Changeover functionality
Any alarm for the generator set can be configured to have change over functionality. When any of these alarms are given, a standby diesel generator starts and connects. The failing generator will then unload and disconnect. After the generator is disconnected the diesel may continue running, cool down and stop or stop directly, dependent on the configuration.
Automatic start and connect on blackout
When a main switchboard blackout occurs, the 1.st. standby diesel generator will start and connect. If it fails to start or connect, the next standby diesel generator will start and connect. It is possible to configure the system to start more than one standby generator on blackout.
Load dependent start and stop of standby generators
When a high load occurs on on the connected generator(s), the 1.st standby generator will start and connect. When the load decreases enough to let a generator disconnect without overloading the remaining, the 1.st to stop generator will disconnect and stop.
Control of heavy consumers start request and start granted
When a heavy consumer start request is received, the power management system will check for available power. * If enough power is available and a predefined number of generators are connected, the power management system gives a start granted to the consumer. * If enough power is not available, the standby generator(s) will automatically start and connect. When enough power is available, a start granted is given to the consumer. * When more than one heavy consumer sends a request for start, only one is granted at a time. The power management system remembers all start requests and enables them in sequence.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
187
5.3

5.3.1 Overview
The power management system is mainly operated through a mimic picture reflecting the ships power distribution system. The system can manage electrical generators driven by diesel engine, steam turbine or the main engine. The operator controls have different configurations dependent on the type of generator drive. A typical mimic picture is shown below:
Figure 115 Typical power management system mimic picture.
5.3.2
How to operate a generator set with start/stop control
Generator set symbol colour interpretation
A generator with its prime mover and circuit breaker (as seen below) is called a generator set. The following information is contained in the colours used for the generator set.
188
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Circuit braker symbol

Red dot: Circuit breaker alarm In disconnected position: Gray: Open Yellow: Syncronizing/connecting In connected position: Green: Connected Yellow: Disconnecting
Generator symbol
Red dot: Generator alarm Gray: Stopped Green: Running, ready to connect
Prime mover symbol

Red dot : Prime mover alarm Gray: Stopped Grey and yellow: Starting Green: Running Green and yellow: Stopping
Generator set information box
Each generator set has an information box containing the following information:
Mode: Local/semi-auto/auto. Operational state of the generator set. Standby status information, priority in brackets. Low load auto stop blocked. Fuel selection/load control selection.
Figure 116 Generator set information box.

To display the control dialog
1 2 3
Select the the power management mimic picture. Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control. Push the READ button. - A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the generator set. This dialog will vary according to how the generator set is configured. The following is a maximum configuration:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
189
Push to start the generator. Push to connect the generator. Push to disconnect the generator. Push to stop the generator. Push to turn off load dependent stop function. Push to set the generator to semi-auto mode. Push to give the generator lower priority. Push to select diesel oil only. Push to turn on load dependent stop function. Push to select frequency and load control by governor. Push to reset alarm messages. Push to set the generator to auto mode. Push to give the generator higher priority. Push to select heavy fuel/diesel oil change over logic. Push to select frequency and load control by DataChie
Figure 117 Control dialog for generator set with start/stop.

Semi Auto mode
In semi auto mode the operator controls the generator set using the buttons in the dialog to start or stop, connect or disconnect it according to the load condition. Note For Semi Auto mode the following applies: * A generator set must be started before it can be connected. * A disconnect will unload and disconnect the generator but the diesel will remain running. * The generator set will not be part of the standby system.
To start a generator
Push Start. - The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. - Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. - Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect.
To connect a generator
This is only possible when the prime mover is running at nominal speed. 1 Push Connect. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.
190
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
To disconnect a generator
Push Disconnect. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
To stop a generator
This is only possible when the circuit breaker is disconnected. 1 Push Stop. - The text cooling down is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After cool down time out the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. - The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped. 2 To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling down, push Stop twice.
Auto mode
In auto mode the generator is automatically started and stopped according to the load condition and the priority setting. Note For Auto mode the following applies: * A disconnect command will cause the following sequence: Unloading, disconnect, cool down and stop. * A stop command will cause the following sequence: Unloading, disconnect and direct stop. * A connect command will cause the following sequence: Starting, synchronizing and connect. * A start command will cause a starting sequence only.
This is only possible when the prime mover is stopped and ready for start. 1 Push Connect. - The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. - Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. - Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
191
Push Disconnect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected. - The text cooling down is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After cool down time out the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. - The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped. 2 To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling down, push Stop twice.
To stop a generator
When the circuit breaker is connected: 1 Push Stop. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected. - The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped. This is a direct stop without cooling down period. When the circuit breaker is disconnected: 1 Push Stop. - The text cooling down is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After cool down time out the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. - The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped. 2 To stop the prime mover immediately push Stop twice.
Push Start. - The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. - Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. - Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect.
192
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Stop block On/Off
Push On to block the load dependent stop function.
- This means that the generator will not stop when there is a low load on the main switchboard. 2 Push Off to activate the load dependent stop function. - This means that the generator will stop when there is a low load on the main switchboard.
Pri. Higher/Lower
The generator set with the highest priority will start first and stop last. The generator set with the lowest priority will start last and stop first. 1 2 Push Pri. Higher to give the generator set a higher standby priority. The indicated standby number is lowered by one. Push Pri. Lower to give the generator set a lower standby priority.The indicated standby number is increased by one.
HFO - Heavy Fuel Oil
Push HFO to activate the heavy fuel oil change over logic. - The heavy fuel oil change over logic will start and stop the prime mover using diesel oil, but will switch to heavy fuel oil during loaded condition.
DO - Diesel Oil
Push DO to run the prime mover on diesel oil only. - The heavy fuel oil change over logic is not in use.
Droop
Push Droop to select frequency and load control by the DataChief C20, based on diesel engine speed governor droop curve (static).
Isochron - Isochroneous
Push Isochron to select frequency and load control by the diesel engine speed governor.
Reset
Push Reset to reset any alarm messages. - Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!
5.3.3
How to operate a generator set without start/stop control
Applicable for shaft generators.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
193
1 2 3
Select the power management mimic picture. Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control. Push the READ button. - A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the generator set. - The following illustration shows what each of the buttons are used for:
Push to connect the generator. Push to disconnect the generator. Push to reset alarm messages.
Figure 118 Control dialog for generator set without start/stop.

Connect
Push Connect. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. - When the shaft generator is syncronizing, the diesel generators connected to the bus bar will regulate the frequency just below the frequency of the shaft generator. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.
Disconnect
Push Disconnect. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. - When the shaft generator is unloading, the diesel generators connected to the same bus bar will increase their power to take the load off the shaft generator. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
Reset
5.3.4
How to operate a generator set without start, stop with adjustable load setpoint
Applicable for steam turbine generators.
194
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1 2 3
Select the the power management mimic picture. Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control. Push the READ button. - A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the generator set. - The following illustration shows what each of the buttons are used for:
Push to connect the generator. Push to disconnect the generator. Push to activate the new load setpoint value. Push to reset alarm messages. Insert the load setpoint value here.
Figure 119 Control dialog for generator set without start/stop with adjustable load setpoint.
Connect
Push Connect. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.
Disconnect
Push Disconnect. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
Load setp. - load setpoint
1 2 3 4
Move the cursor to the load setpoint text box. Push the READ button to select it. Type in the new load setpoint. Push OK. - The generator will change the load according to the new setpoint.
Reset
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
195
5.3.5
How to operate the main switchboard controller
Main switchboard controller symbols
The main switchboard is available with two different layouts dependent on the system configuration. The following information is provided:
Available (spare) power. Frequency of generated power. Voltage of generated power. Status: Local/semi-auto/auto. Low load autostop blocked. Symmetric/asymmetric load sharing mode. Amount of power generated. Operational state, red text indicates an alarm condition.
Figure 120 Main switchboard controller alternative 1.

Available (spare) power. Operational state, red text indicates an alarm condition.
Figure 121 Main switchboard controller alternative 2.

1 2 3
Select the the power management mimic picture. Move the cursor to the main switchboard. Push the READ button. - A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the the main switchboard. - The following illustration shows what each of the buttons are used for:
196
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Push to select symmetric load sharing. Push to select asymmetric load sharing. Push to set the main switchboard controller to semiauto mode. Push to set the main switchboard controller to auto mode. Push to reset alarm messages.
Figure 122 Control dialog for the main switchboard.

Auto
Push Auto to set the main switchboard controller in auto mode. The standby and blackout recovery functions are in operation. - When the load increases above an adjustable limit the standby generator with the highest priority starts. - When the load decreases below an adjustable limit the standby generator with the lowest priority number stops. - At a blackout the standby generator with the highest priority starts. - At a failure on a connected generator the generator with the highest priority starts. A changeover takes place.
SemiAuto
Note
Used for commissioning purposes, do not use for normal operation! Selecting SemiAuto will cause a Non Standby alarm. 1 Push SemiAuto to set the main switchboard controller in SemiAuto mode. This will deactivate all logic mentioned under Auto above.
Sym - Symmetric
Push Sym for symmetric load sharing between the generators. - The load is shared equally between the generators.
Asym - Asymmetric
Push Asym for asymmetric load sharing between two connected generators. When more than two generators are connected the asymmetric load sharing is switched of automatically and will use symmetric load sharing. - The asymmetric load sharing will attempt the following: * Run one of the two generators close to the low limit of 20%.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
197
* Run one of the two generators close to the high load limit of about 80%. * After an adjustable period of time the two generators will swap load setpoints.
Reset
Push to reset the main switchboard controller when in state Operation Blocked, Remote Control.
5.3.6
How to operate a bus tie breaker
The control dialog is project specific and may vary from the illustration below. 1 2 3 Select the the power management mimic picture. Move the cursor to the bus tie breaker. Push the READ button. - A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the the bus tie breaker is displayed.
Connect
Push Connect. - The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that the bus tie breaker is closed.
Disconnect
Push Disconnect. - The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that the bus tie breaker is open.
Reset
5.3.7
How to operate the one touch auto sequence
One touch auto sequencing allows you to set the main switchboard to a set of predefined configurations by pushing a button.
One touch auto sequence controller symbol
To simplify power management one touch auto sequencing allows you to set the main switchboard to a set of predefined configurations by pushing a button. Typical main switchboard configurations are:
198
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
* DG-mode (diesel generator mode) * Manoeuvre mode * PTO-mode (shaft generator mode) * PTI-mode (electric propulsion mode)
Figure 123 One touch auto sequence symbol, indicating current state of operation.
The control dialog is project specific and may vary from the illustration below. 1 2 3 Select the the power management mimic picture. Move the cursor over the one touch auto sequence symbol. Push the READ button. - A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the the one touch auto sequence. - The following illustration shows what each of the buttons are used for:
Push a mode button to activate it. Push to abort the selected sequence. Push to reset.
Figure 124 One touch auto sequence dialog box.

To select modes
Push the button for the desired mode. - The system automatically makes the necessary actions to set the main switchboard to this mode.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
199
5.4

5.4.1 Overview
The power management system is mainly operated through a mimic picture reflecting the ships power distribution system. The system can manage electrical generators driven by diesel engine, steam turbine or the main engine. The operator controls have different configurations dependent on the type of generator drive. A typical mimic picture is shown below.
Figure 125 Typical power management system mimic picture.
5.4.2
How to operate the main switchboard controller
To display the control picture
1 2
Select the the power management mimic picture. Using the navigator key move the cursor to select one of the switchboards. Push Enter. - A new picture showing the switchboard and text for the function keys appear.
ENTER
200
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 126 Typical main switchboard controller. 4 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all available functions for the function keys. - The number of functions will vary according to how the switchboard is configured. Push the function key for the desired function. - The following functions are available: * Symmetric * Asymmetric * Connect more power * Disconnect surplus power * Stop block on * Stop block off * Reset * Auto * Semi-auto
F1 - F4
Symmetric
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Symmetric for symmetric load sharing between the generators. - The load is shared equally between the generators.
Asymmetric
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Asymmetric for asymmetric load sharing between two connected generators. When more than two generators are connected the asymmetric load sharing is switched of automatically and will use symmetric load sharing. - The asymmetric load sharing will attempt the following:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
201
* Run one of the two generators close to the low limit of 20%. * Run one of the two generators close to the high load limit of about 80%. * After an adjustable period of time the two generators will swap load setpoints.
Reset
F1 - F4
Push the function key for to reset the main switchboard controller when in state Operation Blocked, Remote Control.
Auto
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Auto to set the main switchboard controller in auto mode. The standby and blackout recovery functions are in operation. - When the load increases above an adjustable limit the standby generator with the highest priority starts. - When the load decreases below an adjustable limit the standby generator with the lowest priority number stops. - At a blackout the standby generator with the highest priority starts. - At a failure on a connected generator the generator with the highest priority starts. A changeover takes place.
SemiAuto
Note
Used for commissioning purposes, do not use for normal operation! Selecting SemiAuto will cause a Non Standby alarm. 1 Push the function key for SemiAuto to set the main switchboard controller in SemiAuto mode. This will deactivate all logic mentioned under Auto above.
5.4.3
How to operate a generator set with start/stop control
Generator set symbol colour interpretation
A generator with its prime mover and circuit breaker (as seen below) is called a generator set. The following information is contained in the colours used for the generator set.
202
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Circuit braker symbol

Red dot: Circuit breaker alarm In disconnected position: Gray: Open Yellow: Syncronizing/connecting In connected position: Green: Connected Yellow: Disconnecting
Generator symbol
Red dot: Generator alarm Gray: Stopped Green: Running, ready to connect
Prime mover symbol

Red dot: Prime mover alarm Gray: Stopped Grey and yellow: Starting Green: Running Green and yellow: Stopping
1 2
Select the the power management mimic picture. Using the navigator key move the cursor to the generator set you want to control. Push Enter. - A new picture showing this generator set and text for the function keys appear.
ENTER
Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all available functions for the function keys. - The number of functions will vary according to how the generator set is configured.
F1 - F4
Push the function key for the desired function. - The following functions are available: * Connect * Disconnect * Reset * Start * Stop * Auto * Semi-auto
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
203
* Stop block on * Stop block off * Pri. higher * Pri. lower * Switch genset
Figure 127 Generator set with start stop control.

To display detailed information
The following detailed information displays are available: * Generator frequency * Generator voltage * Generator current * Generator load * Generator relative load 1 2 Select a generator set as described above. Using the navigator key move the cursor to the information you want to display.
Figure 128 Use the navigator to go between these selections.

ENTER
Push Enter. - A new picture showing the detail display is shown. The following is a detail display for frequency.
204
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 129 Frequency display. 4 Push Enter again to display a tag details view for this tag. - A new picture showing the tag details view is shown. The following is a tag details view for a frequency tag.
Figure 130 Tag details view for a frequency tag. 5 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all available information.
Semi Auto mode
In semi auto mode the operator controls the generator set using the function keys to start or stop, connect or disconnect it according to the load condition. Note For Semi Auto mode the following applies: * A generator set must be started before it can be connected. * A disconnect will unload and disconnect the generator but the diesel will remain running. * The generator set will not be part of the standby system.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
205
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Start. - The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. - Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. - Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect.
This is only possible when the prime mover is running at nominal speed.
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Connect. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Disconnect. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
To stop a generator
This is only possible when the circuit breaker is disconnected.

F1 - F4
Push the function key for Stop. - The text cooling down is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After cool down time out the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. - The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped.
206
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
F1 - F4
To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling down, push the function key for Stop twice.
Auto mode
In auto mode the generator is automatically started and stopped according to the load condition and the priority setting. Note For Auto mode the following applies: * A disconnect command will cause the following sequence: Unloading, disconnect, cool down and stop. * A stop command will cause the following sequence: Unloading, disconnect and direct stop. * A connect command will cause the following sequence: Starting, synchronizing and connect. * A start command will cause a starting sequence only.
This is only possible when the prime mover is stopped and ready for start.
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Connect. - The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. - Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. - Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Disconnect. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected. - The text cooling down is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After cool down time out the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. - The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
207
F1 - F4
To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling down, push Stop twice.
To stop a generator
When the circuit breaker is connected:

F1 - F4
Push the function key for Stop. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected. - The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped. This is a direct stop without cooling down period. When the circuit breaker is disconnected: 1 Push the function key for Stop. - The text cooling down is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After cool down time out the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. - The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped. To stop the prime mover immediately push Stop twice.
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Start. - The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. - Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. - Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect.
Stop block On/Off

F1 - F4
Push the function key for Stop block on to block the load dependent stop function. - This means that the generator will not stop when there is a low load on the main switchboard. Push the function key for Stop block off to activate the load dependent stop function. - This means that the generator will stop when there is a low load on the main switchboard.
F1 - F4
208
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Pri. Higher/Lower
The generator set with the highest priority will start first and stop last. The generator set with the lowest priority will start last and stop first.
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Pri. Higher to give the generator set a higher standby priority. The indicated standby number is lowered by one. Push the function key for Pri. Lower to give the generator set a lower standby priority. The indicated standby number is increased by one.
F1 - F4
HFO - Heavy Fuel Oil

F1 - F4
Push the function key for HFO to activate the heavy fuel oil change over logic. - The heavy fuel oil change over logic will start and stop the prime mover using diesel oil, but will switch to heavy fuel oil during loaded condition.
DO - Diesel Oil
F1 - F4
Push the function key for DO to run the prime mover on diesel oil only. - The heavy fuel oil change over logic is not in use.
Droop
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Droop to select frequency and load control by the DataChief C20, based on diesel engine speed governor droop curve (static).
Isochron - Isochroneous
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Isochron to select frequency and load control by the diesel engine speed governor.
Reset
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages. - Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!
5.4.4
How to operate a generator set without start/stop control
Applicable for shaft generators.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
209
1 2
Select the the power management mimic picture. Using the navigator key move the cursor to the generator set you want to control. Push Enter. - A new picture showing this generator set and text for the function keys appear.
ENTER
F1 - F4
Push the function key for the desired function. - The following functions are available: * Connect * Disconnect * Reset
Figure 131 Generator set without start/stop.

Connect
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Connect. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. - When the shaft generator is synchronizing, the diesel generators connected to the bus bar will regulate the frequency just below the frequency of the shaft generator. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.
210
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Disconnect
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Disconnect. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. - When the shaft generator is unloading, the diesel generators connected to the same bus bar will increase their power to take the load off the shaft generator. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
Reset
F1 - F4
5.4.5
How to operate a generator set without start, stop with adjustable load setpoint
Applicable for steam turbine generators.

1 2
Select the power management mimic picture. Using the navigator key move the cursor to the generator set you want to control. Push Enter. - A new picture showing this generator set and text for the function keys appear.
ENTER
F1 - F4
Push the function key for the desired function. - The following functions are available: * Connect * Disconnect * Load setp. * Reset
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
211
Connect
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Connect. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.
Disconnect
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Disconnect. - The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. - The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
Reset
F1 - F4
5.4.6
How to operate a bus tie breaker
The control picture is project specific and may vary from the illustration below. 1 2 Select the the power management mimic picture. Using the navigator key move the cursor to the bust tie breaker you want to control. Push Enter. - A new picture showing the bus tie breaker is shown.
ENTER
212
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 132 Typical bus tie breaker symbol. 4 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all available functions for the function keys. Push the function key for the desired mode. - The system automatically makes the necessary actions to set the main switchboard to this mode.
Connect
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Connect. - The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that the bus tie breaker is closed.
Disconnect
F1 - F4
Push the function key for Disconnect. - The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that the bus tie breaker is open.
Reset
F1 - F4
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
213
6 REFERENCE GUIDE
6.1 Introduction
This document gives an overview of parameters that can be inspected and adjusted from a Local or Remote Operator Station. Where applicable other details of the parameters are included. The following subjects are covered: - Tage type overview - Alarm and monitoring parameters - Engineers safety
214
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Reference guide
6.2
Tag type overview

The following is a list of available tag types in the DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management. A tag type defines the software used to read a channel on a Distributed Processing Unit. A channel is where a signal connected to a Distributed Processing Unit. The tag type defines witch application to run on the signal. Example: If channel no. 2 in a Remote Analogue Input module (RAi-16) is tag type 20, the input signal is 4- 20 mA.
6.2.1
0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 26 27 29 30 31 32
Basic tag types

Channel type Undefined type Voltage +- 0.1 Voltage +-1 Voltage +-5 Voltage +- 10 Voltage 0 -1 Voltage 0 -1 Voltage 0 -5 Voltage 0 - 10 Milli amps +-1 Milli amps +-5 Milli amps +- 10 Milli amps +- 20 Milli amps 0 -1 Milli amps 0 -5 Milli amps 0 - 10 Milli amps 0 - 20 Milli amps 4 - 20 PT 50 PT 100 PT 1000 Potmeter 1 K Potmeter 5 K On-off without check (RAi-16) On-off single check (RAi-16) On-off double check (RAi-16) RDi-32 digital input
Tag type number
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
215
Tag type number 34 35 36 38 40 41 43 44 45 46 47 49 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 141 142 143 144 200 201 255 150
Channel type Counter event Counter frequency Counter time TC element AC voltage 10 bit AC current 10 bit Generator frequency Bus freq. Phase difference Cosine phi Phase velocity Pick up Exhaust mean Exhaust deviation Rio PLC type DO 401 client DOT (dig. out) handler AO (an. out) 401 client AO (analogue out) handler Exhaust deviation limit Alarm relay Local alarm system LOS 401 client Rotating light handler ASCII IO handler SSC IO handler DS 401 handler Serial AI Serial DI System tag handler Dead man handler
Exhaust tag types are: 128, 129 and 135.
6.2.2
Analogue out tags
Tag type and Distributed Processing Unit type defines the analogue output channel type. If the Distributed Processing Unit type is Remote Analogue Output module, the following analogue output channel types are available:
Channel type number 0 1 Channel type 0- 10.0 Volt +- 10.0 Volt
216
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Reference guide
Channel type number 2 3 4 5
Channel type 0- 5.0 Volt +- 5.0 Volt 0- 20.0 mA 4- 20.0 mA
6.2.3
Relays
Binary out is defined as a channel in a Remote Digital Output module. All channels in a Remote Digital Output module are automatically an output channel type.
6.3
Alarm and monitoring parameters

6.3.1
Parameter Name Enable Grad. Alarm Enable Alarm Low Enable Alarm Low Low Enable Alarm High Enable Alarm High High Enable Event Low Enable Event Low Low Enable Event High Enable Event High High Gradient Block Limit Gradient Limit Limit Alarm Low Low Limit Alarm Low Limit Alarm High Limit Alarm High High Limit Event Low Low
Analogue input tag items

Type Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Function Enable/disable aAlarm Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable event Enable/disable event Enable/disable event Enable/disable event Block if measured value is < block limit Gradient alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Event limit
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
217
Parameter Name Limit Event Low Limit Event High Limit Event High High Filter Time Dynamic Dead Band Counts Low Counts High Eng.Units Low Eng.Units High Raw Value Raw Percent Value Scaled Value Filtered Value
Type Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No
Function Event limit Event limit Event limit Time in 100 milliseconds Report value dead band limit A/D minimum value A/D maximum value Instrument minimum value Instruments maximum value Measured raw value directly from ADC Measured raw value n % of range Measured value scaled to technical value Filtered scaled value
Some of the parameters are further explained below.

Enable alarms and events
Alarms may be enabled or disabled by altering the value of the enable parameters. Select YES for enable, NO for disable.
Gradient parameters
The gradient calculation uses the filtered value as input. In order to make the gradient more robust against noise, it is calculated based on a moving average over the three last samples of the filtered value. When the process value falls below the Block limit the gradient alarm will be blocked. Above this process value, the gradient alarm is activated if the calculated gradient value exceeds the Gradient Limit. Block limit: A process value below this limit inhibits the gradient alarm. Gradient Limit: The gradient alarm is activated if the gradient value in [units/sec] exceeds this limit.
6.3.2
Alarm and event limits
Alarm and event limits are entered in technical units. Each alarm & event limit has its own enable flag. If the enable flag is set, the alarm/event status will be updated. If the enable flag is not set the corresponding status is cleared.
218
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Reference guide
The filtered process value is compared with four alarm and four event limits. The alarm and event status is updated as follows (if the enable flag is set): 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LL= on, if Filtered_value < alarm_LL limit. L = on, if Filtered_value < alarm_L limit. H = on, if Filtered_value > alarm_H limit. HH = on, if Filtered_value > alarm_HH limit. Ev_1 = on, if Filtered_value > event_1 limit. Ev_2 = on, if Filtered_value > event_2 limit. Ev_3 = on, if Filtered_value > event_3 limit. Ev_4 = on, if Filtered_value > event_4 limit.
The LL, L, H and HH alarms are activated as soon as the alarm delays has expired.
6.3.3
Filter time
The filter function is a 2nd order Butterworth filter. The scaled process value is filtered with a user defined filter time constant, which defines the cut-off frequency for the filter. The time constant resolution is 0.1 seconds. A time constant = 0 disables the filter, hence the lowest cut-off frequency is 10 Hz with the time constant set to 0.1 seconds.
6.3.4
Dynamic deadband
The dynamic dead band is entered in engineering units with the same number of decimals as specified for the process value. The dynamic dead band parameter is only in use if the external tag parameter is set to YES. This parameter is used for dynamic update of the process value for external tag users. When the process value becomes greater/less than the last sent value with more than the dynamic dead-band, a new value is sent.
6.3.5
Scaling parameters
The scaling parameters are given in corresponding pairs of technical values and measured values read from the analogue to digital converter. The technical sensor range is: Eng.Units High Eng.Units Low. The instrument range is: Counts High Counts Low.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
219
Eng. value
EU High
Counts Low
ADC Input Counts High
EU Low
Figure 133 Scaling parameters.
Measured values
Each channel is sampled from a 16 bit analogue to digital converter every 10 milliseconds. The result of this sampling is a value in the range 0 65535 Counts. Depending on the type of signal connected, the legal count range may be less. The table below shows the count range for the different signal types available:
Code 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 26 27 Short Text VOLT_PM_01 VOLT_PM_1 VOLT_PM_5 VOLT_PM_10 VOLT_0_01 VOLT_0_1 VOLT_0_5 VOLT_0_10 MA_PM_1 MA_PM_5 MA_PM_10 MA_PM_20 MA_0_1 MA_0_5 MA_0_10 MA_0_20 MA_4_20 PT_50 PT_100 PT_1000 POT_1K POT_5K Counts High 45874 45874 45874 58981 45874 45874 45874 58981 58981 39321 45874 58981 58981 39321 45874 58981 58981 1) 1) 1) 2) 2) Counts Low 19660 19660 19660 6553 32767 32767 32767 32767 6553 26214 19660 6553 32767 32767 32767 32767 38010 1) 1) 1) 2) 2)
220
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Reference guide
The RTD elements are automatically calculated based on interpolation with values fetched from a predefined table. The scaling parameters are therefore not adjustable. The potentiometer signal types are automatically calculated based on a conversion algorithm. The counts scaling parameters is therefore not adjustable.
The Raw Value for a channel is the result of the sampling of the analogue to digital converter. By using the scaling parameters the Scaled Value is calculated, and from this value the raw percent value is calculated ( 100.00). The Scaled Value is used as input to the 2 nd order butterworth filter to produce the Filtered Value.
6.3.6
Counter input tag items

Type Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Function Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable event Enable/disable event Enable/disable event Enable/disable alarm Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Event limit Event limit Event limit Event limit Time in 100 milliseconds Counter input pin filter
Parameter Name Enable Alarm Low Enable Alarm Low Low Enable Alarm High Enable Alarm High High Enable Event Low Enable Event Low Low Enable Event High Enable Event High High Limit Alarm Low Low Limit Alarm Low Limit Alarm High Limit Alarm High High Limit Event Low Low Limit Event Low Limit Event High Limit Event High High Filter time Filter index
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
221
Parameter Name Time base
Type Number
Adjustable Yes
Function Counting time code: ms=0:s=1:min=2:hr =3 Pulses per engineering unit. Measured raw value directly from counter Measured value scaled to technical value Filtered scaled value
Pulses per Eng.Unit Raw value Scaled value
Number Number Number
Yes No No
Filtered value Dynamic dead band
Number Number
No No
Parameters specific to counter inputs are described below.

Counter input parameters Filter Index
When using the counter as an event counter it is possible to filter the counter input signal with a digital filter in orderto avoid contact noise to be counted. The Filter Index parameter specifies the digital filter cut-off frequency according to the table below.
Filter Index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Cut-off frequency 1 HZ 5 HZ 10 HZ 50 HZ 100 HZ 500 HZ 1667 HZ
Time Base
When using the counter for frequency or time measurements the Time base parameter specifies in which time unit the measurement shall be calculated. The following values are available:
Time Base 0 1 2 3 Time unit Milliseconds Seconds Minutes Hours
Note
Time base = 0 is not available when using the counter in frequency mode.
222
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Reference guide
Pulses per Eng.Unit
When using the counter in frequency measurement mode the scaling algorithm need to know the number of pulses generated by the counting sensor per engineering unit. This is specified in the Pulses pr. Eng Unit parameter. Pulses per engineering unit is for instance: 10 pulses per liter (flow rate). 120 pulses per revolution (engine RPM). 100 of pulses per knot (ship speed).
Counter input measured values Raw Value
This value is read directly from the counter. In event counting mode this value is the same as the scaled value.
Scaled Value
In event counting mode the scaled value is the same as the raw value. In frequency, counting mode the scaled value is calculated from the raw value by using the Pulses pr. Eng Unit and the time base parameters. In time mode, only the Time base parameter is used to calculate the Scaled value.
Filtered Value
The Scaled Value is used as input to the 2nd order butterworth filter to produce the Filtered Value.
6.3.7
On delay Off delay
Digital input tag items

Type Number Number Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Number Number Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Function Delay in 100 milliseconds Delay in 100 milliseconds Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable event Enable/disable event Invert input status Input status before time delay Input status after time delay
Parameter Name
Enable Alarm Low Enable Alarm High Enable Event Low Enable Event High Invert Input value Delayed input
Only the parameters specific to digital inputs are described below.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
223
Digital input parameters Delays
Digital input status is delayed to remove rapid irrelevant transitions. The delay time specifies how long time the signal must be stable before the new input value is accepted. The delay time is specified in units of 100 milliseconds. The value 20 means a delay of 2 seconds.
Invert
The input value can be used directly or inverted before use. Specify YES to invert the input signal.
Input Values
Input status both before and after time delay is available.
6.3.8
Exhaust mean value tag items

Type Number Yes/no Yes/no Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Function Alarm limit Alarm enable/disable Alarm enable/disable Alarm limit Alarm blocking limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Temperature tagnumber ref. Temperature tagnumber ref. Temperature tagnumber ref. Temperature tagnumber ref. Temperature tagnumber ref. Temperature tagnumber ref. Temperature tagnumber ref. Temperature tagnumber ref.
Parameter Name Mean temperature high high Enable alarm high Enable alarm high high Mean temperature high Mean temperature block Dev. temperature high Dev. temperature low Cylinder 1 temp Cylinder 2 temp Cylinder 3 temp Cylinder 4 temp Cylinder 5 temp Cylinder 6 temp Cylinder 7 temp Cylinder 8 temp
224
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Reference guide
Parameter Name Cylinder 9 temp Cylinder 10 temp Cylinder 11 temp Cylinder 12 temp Cylinder 13 temp Cylinder 14 temp Cylinder 15 temp Cylinder 16 temp Dynamic alarm limit Mean Temp
Type Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Function Temperature tagnumber ref. Temperature tagnumber ref. Temperature tagnumber ref. Temperature tagnumber ref. Temperature tagnumber ref. Temperature tagnumber ref. Temperature tagnumber ref. Temperature tagnumber ref. Deviation alarm limit Calculated mean temp
Exhaust mean value parameters Mean Temp High High/Enable alarm High High
If the mean temperature high high enable is set to YES, the mean temperature high high alarm is activated if the calculated mean temperature increases above the mean temperature High high limit.
Mean Temp High
The mean temperature high alarm is activated if the calculated mean temperature increases above the mean temperature high limit.
Dynamic deviation alarm limit
Alarm limit at current mean temperature.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
225
Mean Temp block/Dev. Temp. high/Dev. Temp. Low
If the mean temperature falls below the mean temperature block limit, all deviation alarms are inhibited. The Dev. Temp. low limit defines the maximum allowed deviation from the mean temperature for each cylinder when the mean temperature is equal to the mean temperature block limit. The Dev. Temp high limit defines the maximum allowed deviation from the mean temperature for each cylinder when the mean temperature is equal to the mean temperature high alarm limit. The actual deviation alarm limit is a dynamical calculated alarm limit that each cylinder uses for deviation alarm detection. The figure below gives a graphical illustration of the different parameters.
Cylinder Exhaust Temperature _C 600
Alarm Zone
dtH : Cylinder Exh. temp Deviation high limit at Mean temp high limit
500
400
300
200
Alarm Zone
dtL : Cylinder Exh. temp Deviation low limit at Mean temp low limit Engine Mean Temperature 100 200 300 400 500 600 _C
100
Alarms are Inhibited in this area
mtB : Mean temp. al arm blocking limt
mtH : Mean temp. high alarm limt
Figure 134 Exhaust mean value parameters.

Cylinder 1 16 temperature
The cylinder (1 16) temperature parameters are tag number references for each cylinders temperature measurement. Only the cylinder references that are in use are used for calculating the mean temperature.
226
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Reference guide
Mean temperature
The mean temperature is calculated as an average of all the cylinders specified in the cylinder temperature reference parameters. Cylinder temperatures that are in instrument fail are not used in the calculation.
6.3.9
Exhaust deviation tag items

Type Number Number Number Adjustable Yes Yes No Function Correction temp This temperature tagnumber ref. Measured temperature + temperature correction
Parameter name Correction temp Cylinder temperature ref. Normalized temp
There has to be one exhaust deviation tag item for each cylinder. This tag item checks the normalised cylinder temperature against the deviation alarm limit calculated by the exhaust mean temperature tag item and activates the exhaust deviation alarm if the normalised temperature is outside the legal deviation range.
Exhaust deviation parameters Correction temperature
Each cylinders correction temperature is calculated only on request from the operator. This is normally done when the engine is running in steady state at 100% load. The reason for using a correction temperature is that all cylinders have their own normal operating temperatures, which mostly are not equal to the engine mean temperature. By Adding the correction temperature to the real cylinder temperature, the cylinder temperature is normalised so that the deviation alarm limits are valid for all cylinders. The correction temperature is calculated in the following way:
Correction_temperature = Meantemp RealCylindertemp
Cylinder temperature reference
The cylinder temperature ref. parameter is a tag number reference to the cylinders temperature.
Normalised Temp
The Normalised temperature is calculated in the following way:

Cylinder_normalised_temp = RealCylindertemp + Correction_temp
This normalised cylinder temperature is again used for checking against the deviation limits to generate the deviation alarm.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
227
6.3.10 Common submenu items

Parameter Name Tag type Decimal point External tag Tag name Type Number Number Yes/no Text Adjustable Yes Yes No No Function RIO channel type Fixed point location for tag analoge value Yes if tag is used by some other tag Tags global name
Common submenu parameters Tag type
The channel type is a code specifying how the input signal is handled and scaled. There are 255 different codes available.
Decimal point
Technical process values are represented as a fixed-point value. The number 234.23 is internally represented with a value of 23423 and a decimal point of 2. Note that control applications mostly have decimal point 1.
Tag names
The External Tag parameter = YES means that this tag is used by another module. Most control applications are externals. The tags value will be automatically transmitted for external use. The Tag Name parameter is the global tag name. These parameters can not be changed from a Local Operator Station.
6.3.11 Alarm submenu items

Parameter Name Alarm on delay1 Alarm off delay1 Alarm on delay2 Alarm off delay2 Inhibit on delay Inhibit off delay Inhibit tag Type Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Function High/ low delay on (1 second) High/ low delay off (1 second) HighHigh/lowlow delay on (1 second) Highhigh/lowlow delay off (1 second) Inhibit delay on (1 second) Inhibit delay off (1 second) Tagnumber to inhibit this channel
228
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Reference guide
Alarm and inhibit deleays
There are separate parameters for alarm delay on and off, as well as delay of inhibit on and off. When the conditions for alarm or inhibit is changed, a timer is started. The new condition must be stable for the time specified by the delay parameter before the new alarm condition is accepted and an event is issued. Delays are specified in seconds.
Inhibit parameters Tag Number
Specifies the tag number to check status for. The specified tag numbers external parameter must be set to activate the Process Data Object (PDO) transmission on changes.
6.4
Engineers safety
The engineers safety (dead man) system is a system for engineer fitness. When activated, the reset button must be pressed by the engineer within predefined time period, if not, the system will indicate Engineer fitness alarm.
6.4.1
Functions
Start, stop and reset from pushbuttons. Control from the Remote Operator Station. Warning light activated by relay. Alarm horn activated by relay. Range check of timers according to IMO rules. When active, the system will activate a rotating light after expired time delay. The engineer must now reset the system. If the system is not reset within a new time period, the system will activate an alarm. Reset can be pressed at any time. The system will typically be activated from the Remote Operator Station by selected alarms when running an unattended engine room.
6.4.2
Local control
The system is activated and de-activated manually by a key-switch. The system can also be activated automatically from the alarm system when an engine room alarm occurs during unattended engine room. A number of reset push buttons are located around the ship.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
229
6.4.3
Remote Operator Station control
When an alarm occur in bridge watch, the engineer safety handler is activated. The timers are reset every time activated. The timers are not reset by the command from Remote Operator Station, if already running.
6.4.4
Parameter name
Tag1: Start Tag2: Stop Tag3: Reset Tag4: On Watch
Parameters
Type
Number Number Number Number
Adj.
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Function
Start/on digital input Tag reference Stop/off digital input Tag reference Reset digital input Tag reference Remote Operator Station Tag for telling the Dead man system that someone is set on Watch Remote Operator Station Tag for telling the Dead man system that a new alarm is activated. Time from reset or start until warning is activated Time from warning is activated until alarm Enable check timers according to IMO rules for machinery dead man system
Initial value
Par. ref.
Tag1 Tag2 Tag3 Tag4
Tag5: New Alarm
Number
Yes
Tag5
T1: Warning time T2: Alarm time S1: IMO Compliant
Number
Yes
20 Min
P1
Number Yes/no
Yes Yes
150 Sec Yes
P2 B1
Tag 4 and 5 are used when the dead man handler is part of the Watch Calling System at the Remote Operator Station. Then the tag pointed to by tag4 is active when the Watch Calling System is set to bridge watch. When an alarm occurs in bridge watch, the tag pointed to by tag5 will be activated, and this will activate the dead man handler in the same way as if tag1 was activated. Decimal point is 0.
230
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
7 MAINTENANCE
7.1 Introduction
This chapter explains how to keep the system in good working order and what to do if the system fails. The following subjects are covered: - Overview - Unit replacement - Preventive maintenance - Troubleshooting Remote Operator Stations - Troubleshooting Midi Operator Stations - Troubleshooting Local Operator Stations - Troubleshooting the Watch Calling System - Troubleshooting Distributed Processing Units
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
231
7.2
Overview
This maintenance chapter is intended for trained maintenance technicians or engineers with experience of electronic and digital circuits, computers and electro mechanical design. The level of information is based on Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems maintenance philosophy: The onboard technical personnel shall, with the help of the documentation and the systems built-in test functions, be able to identify malfunctions, locate the fault, and replace major parts, modules and components on a Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) level. He/she will however not attempt to repair the LRUs.
Note
Cleaning with abrasive material or strong chemical cleaning solutions is not recommended as these may damage the system.
7.3
Note
Unit replacement
Turn power off before replacing any parts! DataChief C20 units are not field repairable. Any attempt will void the warranty. Package faulty units using the box from the replacement unit and send it to Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems for repair.
WARNING
Refer to page 271 for information on how to get in touch with us.
7.3.1
Recommended tools
Drawings of the installation. Digital multimeter. Sensor simulator. Screwdriver for wire terminals: Flat 3 x 0.7 mm. Screwdriver for screen termination board: Flat 7 x 1.0 mm. Screwdriver Pozidriv: POZI #1. Cable ties.
232
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
7.4
Preventive maintenance
7.4.1 General
Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems recommends the followingpreventive maintenance routine for the DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management: Weekly: Clean all operator panels, and run the on-line lamp and unit function tests. Clean all filters for units equipped with fans. 6-Monthly: Check cables and cable entrances, electrical screw-terminals, fuse connections and plug connections. Yearly: Check and if necessary calibrate the input sensors and output actuators according to the manufacturers instructions. The Classification Societies and/or the Ships Maintenance Plan (or Sites Maintenance Plan) should be referred to for obtaining a recommended preventive maintenance schedule for test of measuring-points and the alarm-system. Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems recommends that the operation of each unit and its functions is checked after any major maintenance. By major maintenance is understood the removing, testing, calibrating and re-installing or replacement of pressure sensors, temperature sensors etc. After this type of maintenance, we recommend each unit to be re-commissioned according to the instruction given in this manual.
7.4.2
Weekly maintenance
This maintenance routine applies to units equipped with lamp and/or function test buttons. Pushing function test buttons will not interrupt normal system operation. Do the following:
Remote Operator Stations
Each week do the following for each Remote Operator Station: 1 Clean the front of the panel and graphics display unit using a clean cloth and a solution of warm, mild soapy water - not too wet. 2 Push LAMP TEST. - All alarm group and the SYSTEM FAILURE indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on for about five seconds. - If the test fails, refer to the trouble shooting section. 3 If the Remote Operator Station is fitted with an external air filter, clean it. - Additional preventive maintenance procedures, if any to be carried out as described in the manufacturers manual for each unit.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
233
Each week do the following for each Midi Operator Station: 1 Clean the surface of the Midi Operator Station and display screen. Wipe the surfaces with a clean damp cloth. For heavier cleaning, use a clean, damp cloth which has been dipped in a solution of a mild dish detergent and water. Wring out firmly before wiping the unit. Never use cleaning solutions containing spirit or alcohol.
Local Operator Stations
Each week do the following for each Local Operator Station: 1 2 3 Clean the front of the unit using a clean cloth and a solution of warm, mild soapy water - not too wet. Push TEST and then ENTER. - All indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on. Push SOUND OFF. - Use SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN to turn indicators and buzzer on and off. 4 Push MENU UP to exit the test. 5 6 7 Push SELECT DOWN and ENTER. Push each button and verify that the button function is printed on the display. Push TEST to exit. - If the test fails, refer to trouble shooting section.
Watch Calling System
Each week do the following for each Watch Bridge and Watch Cabin Unit: 1 2 3 Clean the front of the unit using a clean cloth and a solution of warm, mild soapy water - not too wet. Push LAMP TEST. All indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on. The display (if any) should display configuration data. - If the test fails, refer to the trouble shooting section. - If one or more LEDs fail to illuminate or the buzzer is silent, replace the unit.
Distributed Processing Units
The distributed processing units do not require weekly maintenance.
234
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
7.4.3
6-monthly maintenance
Where applicable; check the following parts of the system each 6-month period: 1 2 3 Check cables and cable entrances for dammage to the cable. Tighten all electrical screw-terminals. Tighten all plug connections.
7.4.4
Yearly maintenance
Each year, check and if necessary calibrate the input sensors and output actuators according to the manufacturers instructions. In general, it is not necessary to re-calibrate sensors if the input signal is correct. Compare the input signal to this system, with the input signals on other systems or local gauges. Sensors can be calibrated in two ways; by calibrating the sensor or the signal itself, or by calibrating the signal using the software calibration tool built into the DataChief C20. The calibration software is accessible from the Tag Details menu on the Remote Operator Station, or from the Local Operating Station when available. Refer to the Classification Societies and/or the Ships Maintenance Plan (or Sites Maintenance Plan) for obtaining a recommended preventive maintenance schedule for test of measuring-points and the alarm-system. The societies normally recommend a 3-monthly to 6-monthly schedule.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
235
7.5
Troubleshooting Remote Operator Stations

7.5.1 How to use the Service console program
Introduction
Caution
The Service console program should only be used by trained personnel. Improper use may seriously degrade the performance of the DataChief C20 system. The main functions of Service console are: Start Remote Operator Station(s). Stop Remote Operator Station(s). Copy databases containing the systems configuration data from Remote Operator Station 1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s). Copy project specific software from Remote Operator Station 1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s). Copy any selected files. Back-up selected project data. Restore project data from back-up files. Install updates to the system software (service packs) to the Remote Operator Stations. Check the status of installed software in selected Remote Operator Stations against Remote Operator Station 1
Note
When installing/copying files the Remote Operator Station copied to must be stopped.
236
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
Explanation to the System Information Display
To start the Service console program go to the System information display dialog.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
237
Explanation to the main dialog
The following two illustrations briefly explains the main functions of the main dialog. Consult the operating procedures for step by step procedures on how to use it.
238
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
239
Explanation to the Backup dialog
Dialog to specify the type of files and destination for the back-up.
How to start Service console
At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following: 1 2 3 Push the System Information Display button. Select Service console. Type in the password and push enter. - The main Service console window is displayed.
How to stop Remote Operator Stations
When installing/copying files the Remote Operator Station copied to must be stopped. At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following: 1 2 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select Remote Operator Stations. Push the Stop Station button. - The selected Remote Operator Stations are stopped.
How to start Remote Operator Stations
After copying files into Remote Operator Station(s), restart it. At the Remote Operator Station 1 do the following: 1 2 Use the trackball and trackball button to select Remote Operator Stations. Push the Start Station button. - The selected Remote Operator Stations are started.
240
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
How to copy the database
The following describes how to copy the database from Remote Operator Station 1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s). At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following: 1 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select Remote Operator Station(s). 2 3 Push the Stop Stations button. Push the Copy Database button.
- The database is copied into the selected Remote Operator Station(s). 4 Push the Start Stations button.
How to copy project software
The following describes how to copy the project specific software from Remote Operator Station 1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s). At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following: 1 2 3 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select Remote Operator Station(s). Push the Stop Stations button. Push the Copy Project SW button.
- The project specific software is copied into the selected Remote Operator Station(s). 4 Push the Start Stations button.
How to copy files into Remote Operator Stations
The following describes how to copy files from Remote Operator Station 1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s). At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following: 1 2 3 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select Remote Operator Station(s). Push the Stop Stations button. Push the Copy Files button.
- The Select Files to Copy dialog is displayed. 4 Select the required files and push Open. - The files are copied into the selected Remote Operator Station(s). 5 Push the Start Stations button.
How to update differences
The following describes how to update file differences between Remote Operator Station 1 and the selected Remote Operator Station(s). At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
241
1 2 3
Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select Remote Operator Station(s). Push the Stop Stations button. Push the Update Diffs button. - All files with differences from those in Remote Operator Station 1 are copied into the selected Remote Operator Station(s).
Push the Start Stations button.
How to back-up project data
The following describes how to back-up project data from Remote Operator Station 1 either to a specified path on the hard disk or to floppy disk. At the Remote Operator Station 1 do the following: 1 2 Push the Backup button. - The Backup dialog is displayed. Do one of the following: * Select a group from the pull-down Filter menu or 3 4 5 * Select the relevant file types under Include. If you want the back-up on floppy disk, insert a disk and push to disks(A). If you want the back-up to a different path than c:\Ros push Advanced and type in the path. Push the Make Backup button. - The back-up is created as specified.
How to restore project data
The following describes how to restore project data to Remote Operator Station 1 either from a specified path on the hard disk or from floppy disk. At the Remote Operator Station 1 do the following: 1 2 3 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select all Remote Operator Stations. Push the Stop Stations button. Push the Restore button.
- The Restore dialog is displayed. 4 If the back-up is on floppy disk insert it and select the files to restore. 5 Push the Restore button. - The files are restored as specified.
242
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
How to install service a service pack
The following describes how to install a service pack on your DataChief C20. The service pack is installed on all Remote Operator Stations simultaneously. At the Remote Operator Station 1 do the following: 1 2 3 4 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select all Remote Operator Station. Push the Stop Stations button. Push the Install button. Select the file(s) to install. - The service pack is unzipped and distributed to all Remote Operator Stations. 5 Push the Start Stations button.
7.5.2
1 2
How to set up a Remote Operator Station from an image file
Turn power to the Remote Operator Station off. Put the CD with the Remote Operator Station image file CD into the CD-ROM reader and the boot floppy disk into the floppy-drive. Turn power on. - The image program will then guide you through the process of restoring the software.
Note
If the hard disc has defects, it is not possible to restore the Remote Operator Station from an image file.
How to set up the Local Area Network
Use 3 COM cards for all Local Area Network connections. 1 Install both cards before turning power on. - This ensures that all Remote Operator Stations get the same IRQ address for the same network card. - This means that network cards for network A and B has the same position on all Remote Operator Stations. 2 3 Connect a PC keyboard to the Remote Operator Station. Push the Windows button, point to Settings and click Control panel. Click on Network. Select Protocol tab.
4 5
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
243
6 7 8
Confirm that Network Protocol is: TCP/IP Protocol Click OK and OK again. Close the Control panel window.
How to set the Remote Operator Station name
To set up a Remote Operator Station in a Network it needs a name. To set up computer name do the following: 1 2 3 4 5 Connect a PC keyboard to the Remote Operator Station. Push the Windows button, point to Settings and click Control panel. Click on Network. Select Folder identification tab. Type in the Remote Operator Station name.
- Remote Operator Stations use the following names: ROS1, ROS2, ROS3 etc. 6 In Workgroup, type in ROS. 7 8 Click Apply, and then click OK and OK again. Close the Control panel window.
How to set the IP address
To set up the Remote Operator Station for dual Local Area Network, a specified IP address must be inserted for each LAN card. Do the following to set the IP address: 1 2 3 4 5 Connect a PC keyboard to the Remote Operator Station. Push the Windows button, point to Settings and click Control panel. Click on Network. Select the Protocols tab. Under Adapter select the Local Area Network card you want to configure. One of these:
- [1] 3 Com Etherlink XL NIC (3C900B-COMBO) - [2] 3 Com Etherlink XL NIC (3C900B-COMBO) 6 Tick off Specify an IP address. 7 8 Type in an IP address according to the table below. Type in a Subnet Mask.
244
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
IP-Address LAN A ROS1 ROS2 ROS3 Subnet Mask 172.17.0.100 172.17.0.101 172.17.0.102 255.255.0.0
IP-Address LAN B 172.16.0.100 172.16.0.101 172.16.0.102 255.255.0.0
9 10
Click Apply, and then click OK and OK again. Close the Control panel window.
7.5.3
How to shut down a Remote Operator Station
To avoid malfunctions, follow this procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 Connect a PC keyboard to the Remote Operator Station. Push the Windows button, point to and click Stop DCC20. Push the Windows button, point to and click Shut Down. Click OK. Power will automatically shut off.
7.5.4
How to replace colour graphics displays
A number of different types and sizes of colour graphics displays using both CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) and flat panels can be used with the DataChief C20. The display must how ever be able to handle a screen resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels. Also consider that the new display must fit into the space available. Do the following: 1 2 3 4 5 6 Make sure the colour graphics display is turned off. Disconnect the power cable and then the data cable. Remove the colour graphics display. Place the new colour graphics display in the place of the old one. Connect the data cable and then the power cable. Turn the colour graphics display on. - Confirm that it is working correctly.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
245
7.5.5
How to replace printers
We recommend that the replacement printer is of the same make and model as the old one. However a number of different printers can be used with the DataChief C20. If you change the type of printer used, a new printer driver must be installed in the PC driving the printer. To do this follow the instructions provided with the printer. Keep in mind that the new printer must fit into the space available. Do the following: 1 Make sure the printer is turned off. 2 Disconnect the power cable and then the data cable. 3 Remove the printer. 4 Place the new printer in the place of the old one. 5 Connect the data cable and then the power cable. 6 Turn the printer on. 7 Print any log. - Confirm that the printer is working correctly.
7.5.6
How to replace Operator Control Panels
All Operator Control Panels are identical except for the labels inside the pushbuttons. It is recommended to order replacement panels with the labels for your configuration already installed. In your order specify the ship name or yard and hull number. It is possible to remove the labels from the defective unit and install them in the new unit, but as this is difficult we do not recommend it. Do the following: 1 Remove the mounting screws. 2 Lift the panel up. 3 Disconnect the power cable and then the three data cables. 4 Place the new panel in the place of the old one. 5 Connect the three data cables and then the power cable. 6 Put the panel back in its place. 7 Mount the screws securely. 8 Test that the Operator Control Panel is working correctly.
7.5.7
How to replace Remote Operator Station PCs
Replacement PCs must be ordered from us specifying the ship name or yard and hull number, and which of the Remote Operator station the PC belongs to (ROS1, ROS2, etc.). We will then set up the PC with your system configuration and the correct hardware interfaces.
246
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
It is possible to configure a PC onboard. This how ever requires a service or commissioning engineer. Any attempt to do this will void the warranty.
Replacement
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Shut the PC down and turn power off. Disconnect the power cable and then the data cables noting down exactly where each cable goes. Remove all printed circuit boards in the card slots noting down exactly where each card goes. Place the new PC in the place of the old one. Install the printed circuit cards in the same locations as in the old PC. Connect the data cables and then the power cable. Turn the PC on.
7.5.8
How to install the Remote Operator Station software
Use the following procedure when you have replaced the hard disk or when you have re-installed Windows NT. Note Do not attempt this procedure unless you are very familiar with the Windows operating system. Before you start any action, verify that you have a disk image CD-ROM marked DC60052.0x (x is the number of the software version installed in your system) and a service pack located on a set of floppy disks or a CD-ROM marked DC60052.
Install the disk image
The disk image is a CD-ROM containing the software that was installed in your system at commissioning time. Do the following: 1 2 3 Connect a standard PC keyboard to the Operator Control Panel. Insert the disk image CD-ROM, marked DC60052.0x. On the monitor click Start, point to Shut Down, and select Restart.
- The PC will restart booting from the CD-ROM. The program EasyRestore will automatically start. 4 Answer Yes/OK to questions, and then let the program run. - After about ten minutes you will be asked to restart the PC.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
247
Answer Yes/OK.
Set the LAN address and computer name
Remote Operator Stations use the following computer names and Local Area Network addresses:
Computer name ROS 1 ROS 2 ROS 3 ROS 4 LAN IP address Adapter 1/LAN A 172.17.0.100 172.17.0.101 172.17.0.102 172.17.0.103 LAN IP address Adapter 2/LAN B 172.16.0.100 172.16.0.101 172.16.0.102 172.16.0.103
... Do the following: 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 On the monitor click My Computer, and then click Control Panel. Double-click on Network, and then click the Protocols tab. Click Properties, select each network adapter and set the IP address according to the table above. When finished, click OK. Click the Identification tab, and then Change. Modify the computer name to ROSn (where n is the number of this Remote Operator Station), click OK. Click OK again. When asked to reboot, answer Yes.
- The Remote Operator Station will reboot. 14 If you experience problems with the desktop shortcuts for Start-up DCC20, Shutdown DCC20, or RioLoad see What to do if you have problems with desktop shortcuts below.
Install the latest service pack
The service pack is located on a set of floppy disks or on a CD-ROM marked DC60052. It consists of a number of self-extracting zip files. As an example, service pack DC60052.07.003 consists of the following files: * DC60052_07_003_disk#1.exe * DC60052_07_003_disk#2.exe * DPU 3.02 disk #1.exe
248
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
* DPU 3.02 disk #2.exe * DPU 3.02 disk #3.exe * DPU 3.02 disk #4.exe How to install the latest service pack is described under How to use the Service console earlier in this chapter.
Copy ship specific files and databases
How to copy ship specific files and databases is described under How to use the Service console earlier in this chapter.
Testing the Remote Operator station
Do the following to verify that the Remote Operator Station is now working correctly: 15 16 17 Double-clicking the Startup DCC20 icon. Verify that all items specified in the case ROSn section of the startup script starts without error messages. Verify that the CAN Interface Server (CIS) starts and loads the new configuration data into all Distributed Processing Units it is responsible for.
What to do if you have problems with desktop shortcuts
When changing the computer name of a PC running Windows NT, you may experience problems with shortcuts on the desktop, such as Startup DCC20, Shutdown DCC20, or RioLoad. Typically, when you double-click on an icon, nothing happens. To solve the problem do the following for each problem icon: 18 19 20 21 Right-click on the shortcut, select Properties. Select the Shortcut tab. In the Target field, C:\ROS\config\Bin\.... In the Start in field, C:\ROS\config\Bin\.... replace replace \\ROS1\c \\ROS1\c with with
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
249
7.6
How to install the Midi Operator Station

The Midi operator Station is sealed and contains no user serviceable parts. Opening the unit will void the warranty. If the glass in the screen breaks, be carefull not to cut yourself on the sharp edges of the glass pieces.
WARNING
7.6.1
Placement
Figure 135 Midi Operator Station mounting. Determine the most suitable and convenient place for operation after considering the following conditions: * There is limited exposure to direct sunlight to avoid overheating.
Refer to the requirements on page 44 for suitable ambiant temperatures
* There is good ventilation and minimum vibration. * The minimum distance to a magnetic compass is 500mm (20). * Sufficient space behind the unit is available to allow proper cable connections to the rear panel connectors.
250
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
7.6.2
Cutout
For flushmount installations use the following cutout.
135 95
5 2. s 4pc
243 230
132
Figure 136 MOS 33 cutout drawing.
240
251
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7.6.3
Electrical connections
Power supply connection
* The internal voltage regulator will allow the Midi Operator Station (MOS 33) to operate normally within the power supply voltage range from 10 to 32 V DC. A 24 volt power supply is however recommended. The Midi Operator Station is connected to external power through the terminal list. The cable length between the terminal list and the Midi Operator Station is approximately 2 meters. After connecting the cable to the power source, push the plug as far as it will go into the nine pin receptacle marked PWR on the rear of the cabinet and turn the plugs coupling ring clockwise until it makes a click.
MOS 33
Terminal list
Figure 137 MOS 33 connection drawing.

Fuse
Note
A 4.0 Amp slow fuse should always be installed to protect the unit.
CAN bus interface connection
* The CAN bus connection is also made through the terminal list. Make sure to connect using the correct polarity. Also make sure the end (CAN) terminator supplied with the unit stays in place.
252
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
7.7
Troubleshooting Midi Operator Stations

The Midi operator Station is sealed and contains no user serviceable parts. Opening the unit will void the warranty. If the glass in the screen breaks, be carefull not to cut yourself on the sharp edges of the glass pieces.
WARNING
7.7.1
Troubleshooting checklist
Remedy Faultfind supply voltage.
Symptom Check No picture on display Check that the screen. supply voltage is between 10 32 VDC. Check fuse in power cable fuse holder. Picture appears on the display screen, but image is too dark or too bright. No normal picture or key operation.
Replace fuse. Use slow type 4.0A slow. Adjust light/ contrast.
Disconnect power and connect power again. Replace unit.
7.7.2
Note
How to replace Midi Operator Stations
Never replace more than one Midi Operator Station at a time! Do the following: 1 If the unit is flush mounted remove the corners. 2 Remove mounting screws. 3 4 5 6 7 8 Lift the panel out. Disconnect the cables. Replace the unit. Connect the cables. Replace mounting screws securely. Replace corners if these where removed.
Note
Configuration can only be done at the master Remote Operator Station. 9 10 On the Remote Operator Station, push System Info Display. Use the up/down arrow keys to select Replace Modules and push Enter. - The prompt Enter Password is displayed.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
253
11 Note
Type in the password: *****
For error detection and replacement purposes the Midi Operator Station is treated as a DPU (Distributed Processing Unit). 12 Under DPUs with COMM error, select the failed Midi Operator Station and push Install Replacement DPU.
- After a few moments the system indicates Successfully Replaced DPU. The alarm related to the failing unit disappears. 13 Confirm that the Midi Operator Panel is working correctly thtrough operational use.
254
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
7.8
Troubleshooting Local Operator Stations

7.8.1 Troubleshooting flow diagram
To troubleshooting the Local Operator Station use the following flow diagrams to determine the problem:
Start LOS troubleshooting
Yes
Is the SYSTEM FAIL indicator lit?
No
Check 24volt power input. Is power OK?
No
Replace the fuse or reset the circuit braker.
Yes
Yes
Disconnect and then reconnect power. Green
Check the terminal board inside the mounting frame. Check LED indicator?
Red
The wiring has wrong polarity. Correct the wiring.
Does the LOS operate?
Dark No
Replace the unit.
Yes
Check the LOS again. Still failed?
Yes
Contact us for assistance.
No
Does the LOS operate?
No
END
Yes
Figure 138 Local Operator Station troubleshooting flow diagram. WARNING Health hazard If you remove the mounting frame to check inside, power must be turned ON to check LED indicator, etc. Take care not to touch exposed terminal boards and components! Caution Against equipment damage
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
255
To protect the front of the panel when dismounted, place the panel front downwards onto a soft cloth.
7.8.2
How to replace Local Operator Stations
All Local Control Stations are identical, no configuration is required. Do the following: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Remove the mounting screws. Lift the panel up. Unscrew and remove the left side cover plate. Slide the top panel out. Disconnect the cable. Connect the cable for the new unit. Slide it into place - be careful not to dammage the cable. Mount the side cover and screws securely. Test that the Local Operator Panel is working correctly.
7.8.3
How to recommision a Local Operator Station
- No manual recommissioning is necessary after replacing a Local Operator Station. - The Local Operator Station will check the network and establish contact with the available Distributed Processing Units automatically.
256
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
7.9
Troubleshooting the Watch Calling System

7.9.1 Troubleshooting flow diagrams
The troubleshooting of the Watch Bridge and Watch Cabin Units are identical. Use the following flow diagrams to determine the problem:
Start Watch Calling System troubleshooting
Yes
Is the ROS working correctly?
No
Troubleshoot the ROS.
Yes
Check the mimic display Watch Calling configuration 1 of 2.
Yes
Do you have communication with all WBU/WCU units? Check the ROS interface board to the CAN bus. If OK, troubleshoot the CAN network cables .
No
Yes
Does the WBU/WCU panels operate?
No
Troubleshoot the WBU/ WCU unit using the next troubleshooting flow diagram.
Yes
Check the WCS again. Still failed?
No
END
Yes
Figure 139 Watch Calling System troubleshooting flow diagram.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
257
Start WBU/WCU troubleshooting
Yes
Is the SYSTEM FAIL indicator lit?
No
Check 24volt power input. Is power OK?
No
Replace the fuse or reset the circuit braker.
Yes Check the mimic display Watch Calling configuration 1 of 2. Green
Yes
Check the terminal board inside the mounting frame. Check LED indicator?
Red
The wiring has wrong polarity. Correct the wiring.
Does the WBU/WCU operate?
Dark No
Replace the unit.
Yes
Check the WCS again. Still failed?
Yes
No
Does the WBU/WCU operate?
No
END
Yes
Figure 140 Watch Bridge or Watch Cabin Unit troubleshooting flow diagram. WARNING Health hazard If you remove the mounting frame to check inside, power must be turned ON to check LED indicators, etc. Take care not to touch exposed terminal boards and components! Caution Against equipment damage To protect the front of the panel when dismounted, place the panel front downwards onto a soft cloth.
258
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
7.9.2
How to replace Watch Calling units
There are two types of Watch Bridge Units and two types of Watch Cabin Units. For each type all panels are identical exept for the labels inside the pushbuttons. It is recommended to order replacement panels with the labels for your configuration already installed. In your order specify the ship name or yard and hull number. It is possible to remove the labels from the defective unit and install them in the new unit, but as this is difficult we do not recommend it. Each On Duty engineer has a group of panels defined as belonging to that engineer-position. These are the panels in his/her cabin, office and in public areas. When an engineer is On duty, each of these panels are in On Duty active mode.
Replacement
1 2 3 4 5 6
Remove the mounting screws. Lift the panel up. Unscrew and remove the left side cover plate. Slide the top panel out. Disconnect the cable. Note down the LMT address for both the old and the new unit. - Each watch calling panel has a unique ID, called an LMT address. This address is either found on a label placed on the side of the panel and looks like this:
Figure 141 Label with LMT address - The LMT address is placed at the bottom of the label, in this case NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000008453. - If this label is missing, there should be a smaller label placed on the bottom of the panel or inside the panel looking like this:
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
259
Figure 142 Label with last part of LMT address - The number written at the bottom of the label is last part of the LMT address, in this case 8453, indicating that the LMT address is NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000008453. - If you have a watch calling panel with an LCD display, you can also find the LMT address by pushing LAMP TEST (power must be connected). The LMT address is displayed in line 3 on the LCD display. 7 Connect the cable for the new unit. 8 9 Slide it into place - be careful not to dammage the cable. Mount the side cover and screws securely.
Configuration
WARNING Note
The following should only be done by trained personnel. Configuration can only be done from the master Remote Operator Station. 10 Find the wcall.ini file using the the Windows Explorer.
- It is normally located in the C:\\Ros\Config\Database folder. 11 Double-click the file to open it using the Notepad. 12 Look for a section named Panels that looks something like this: [Panels] Panel1=1,NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000005382 Panel2=2,NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000006165 Panel3=3,NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000006162 Figure 143 Figure 1.3 The panels section of the wcall.ini file. 13 14 15 Locate the LMT address for the panel you replaced. Replace this LMT address with the LMT address of the new panel. Save the wcall.ini file.
260
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
16

Copy the file to the other Remote Operator Stations as follows:

Refer to page 240 for How to start the Service console. Refer to page 241 for How to copy files into Remote Operator Stations.
17

Each DataChief C20 Remote Operator Station must be stopped and started again for the changes to take effect.
Refer to page 240 for How to stop the Remote Operator Stations. Refer to page 240 for How to start Remote Operator Stations.
18
Test that the Watch Calling unit is working correctly
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
261
7.10 Troubleshooting Distributed Processing Units
7.10.1 How to handle Distributed Processing Units error codes

All Distributed Processing Units have Built In Self-Test. These report errors to the Remote Operator Stations on the system channel. - The following table gives an overview of the error codes and appropriate actions:
Error Error description code 49 48 47 46 45 RAM fail Transmitter overcurrent (RAi16 and C1 modules) Fuse fail (RDi32 and C1 modules)
Action Replace the module. Check all channels for high current load. Check all inputs.
Printed circuit board temperature Check the ambient temhigh perature. Parameter flash memory failure Reset the module and try again. If failing again, replace the module.
CAN 1 - plug X8: 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 CAN controller busoff CAN controller error status set CAN controller overrun Rx queue overrun HP Tx queue overrun LP Tx queue overrun Transmit fault CAN 2 - plug X9: CAN controller busoff CAN controller error status set CAN controller overrun Rx queue overrun HP Tx queue overrun LP Tx queue overrun Transmit fault Check CAN connections Check CAN connections
262
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
7.10.2 How to handle Distributed Processing Units communication errors

When the Remote Operator Station gives a communication error for one of the Distributed Processing Units. Do the following: 1 2 Locate the Distributed Processing Unit. Check LED power and status indicators.
Figure 144 LED power indicator. Green indicates that power is available and red that the power has wrong polarity.
Figure 145 LED status indicators. 3 Read the status for each indicator above and check it against the table below.
LED indicators Fault type: Normal operation No application loaded Not initialised Application stopped Run Green Dark Dark Dark Watch dog Dark Red Red Red Info. Flashing yellow Dark Dark Dark End Init. Green Green Dark Green Power Green Green Green Green
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
263
Power has wrong polarity No power
Dark Dark
Dark Dark
Dark Dark
Dark Dark
Red Dark
Follow the action for the fault you found as described below.
Normal operation
Indicators lit: Run (Green), Info. (flashing yellow), End Init. (green) and Power (green). - The unit seems to be working OK. 1 2 3 Check the cabling. Restart the unit by turning power off and then on again. It the Remote Operator Station is still reporting an error replace the module. See procedure below.
No application loaded
Indicators lit: Watch Dog (red), End Init. (green) and Power (green). 1 Return the item to us.
Not initialised
Indicators lit: Watch Dog (red) and Power (green) 1 2 Reload the application from a Remote Operator Station. If the the same indicators are still lit, replace the module. See procedure below.
Application stopped
Indicators lit: Watch Dog (red) and End Init (green) 1 2 Restart the unit by turning power off and then on again. If the Watch Dog indicator is still lit replace the module. See procedure below.
Power connected with wrong polarity
Indicators lit: Power (red) 1 2 Correct the power polarity and check again. If the Power indicator is still red, replace the module. See procedure below.
No power
Indicators lit: None
264
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
1 2
Check power supply and wiring. If the power supply and wiring is OK, replace the module. See procedure below.
7.10.3 How to start or stop Remote Operator Stations

Caution Only to be used by trained personnel. The functionality found here will allow you to stop the complete Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management! 1 2 On the Remote Operator Station, push System Info Display. Use the up/down arrow keys to select Start DC modules and push Enter.
- The prompt Enter Password is displayed. 3 Type in the password. - The following window is displayed. 4 From the list, select the Remote Operator Station you want to start or stop. 5 Under Start/Stop Stations push the appropriate button. - Run State will indicate the status of the selected unit.
Figure 146 Window for starting or stopping of Remote Operator Stations.
7.10.4 How to configure a new DPU channel

Use the following procedure to add an alarm channel to the DataChief C20.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
265
Find a DPU (Distributed Processing Unit) with a spare channel of the correct type.
In the engine-room
Wire the sensor to the spare channel.
At the remote operator station
3 4
Push the System Info Display button. Use the up/down arrow keys to select Unit Display (if not already selected) and push Enter. - The prompt Enter unit number: is displayed on the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Type in the number of the selected DPU and push Enter. - The information about the selected DPU is displayed Use the up/down arrow keys to select the spare channel. Push the Tag details button. Select the Advanced tag details tab using the trackball. Select tag description. Enter the commissioning password: ***** Push Enter. Change the tag description to give it a relevant name for the new alarm.
For analogue channels
13
Under the Advanced Tag Details tab change for example: * Engineering unit type * Engineering unit high * Engineering unit low
14
Under the Tag Details tab change for example: * Logs, delays and alarm limits as relevant.
266
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
Figure 147 Advanced tag details for an analog channel.
Figure 148 Tag details for an analog channel.

For digital channels
15
Under the Tag Details tab change for example: * Logs and delays
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
267
Figure 149 Advanced tag details for an digital channel.
Figure 150 Tag details for an digital channel.

Disable commissioning access
16 17
When finished push the System Info Display button. Use the up/down arrow keys to select Commissioning and push Enter. - The prompt Enter 0 to disable commissioning access: is displayed on the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
268
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Maintenance
18
Type in 0 and push Enter. - Commissioning status changes from Yes to No.
7.10.5 How to replace Distributed Processing Units

Note Never replace more than one DPU unit at a time! All DPUs look very similar. Make sure the replacement unit is of exactly the same type as the failing unit. Type specification is available on the label for each unit. Do the following: 1 2 3 Remove the screws for the termination bracket. Disconnect all connectors. Remove the mounting screws.
Figure 151 Electrical disconnection.
Figure 152 Mechanical disconnection. 4 Install the replacement unit.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
269
5 6
On the Remote Operator Station, push System Info Display. Use the up/down arrow keys to select Replace Modules and push Enter. - The prompt Enter Password is displayed. Type in the password: ***** Under DPUs with COMM error, select the failed unit and push Install Replacement DPU.
7 8
- After a few moments the system indicates Successfully Replaced DPU. The alarm related to the failing unit disappears. 9 Confirm that the DPU is working correctly.
270
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Replaceable parts
8 REPLACEABLE PARTS
8.1 Introduction
This chapter contains a list of spare parts available for the DataChief C20 including part numbers. Not all parts are listed her, only those defined as Line Replaceable Units (LRU) to be changed by on-board maintenance personnel. Information on configuration settings is also included.
8.2
How to get in touch with us

Should you need to get in touch with us for any reason use the following addressing information: Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems Bekkajordet 8 A P.O. Box 1009 N-3194 Horten, NORWAY Telephone switchboard: +47 33 03 20 00 Telephone 24 hours service: +47 91 52 80 82 Fax: +47 85 02 80 82 E-mail for service: service@kmss.no E-mail for spare parts: spares@kmss.no
8.3
Consumable spare Parts

Air filter for Remote Operator Station PC fan for Remote Operator Station Box printer paper 2500 sheet A4-size 2603925 3900282 1200002
8.4
Modules
MOS33 - Midi Operator Station WBU - LCD type with 6 alarm groups WBU - LED type with 16 alarm groups WCU - LCD type with 6 alarm groups WCU - LED type with 16 alarm groups RAi-16 - Remote Analogue input module RAi-10TC - Remote Analogue input thermo coupler RDi-32 - Remote Digital input module 4403239 8100114 8100131 8100138 8100141 8100148 8100161 8100154
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
271
RDi-32a - Remote Digital input module RAo-8 - Remote Analogue output module RDo-16 - Remote Digital output module RIo-C1 - Remote Input Output module RIo-C2 - Remote Input Output module RIo-C3-GP - Generator Protection RIo-C4 - Generator Protection module VCC 440 - Voltage Converter Controller module dPSC - Dual Process Segment Controller PSS - Process Segment StarCoupler LOS - Local Operator Station UPS SMPS 700 V 220vac/24vdc 28A UPS 220vac / 24vdc 10 A for cabinet montage UPS 220/220vac 50/60Hz 780VA Eltech, Pulsar UPS 220/220vac 50/60Hz 1080VA Eltech, Pulsar
8100172 8100153 8100155 8100181 8100182 8100251 8100226 8100242 8100183 8100184 8100158 3800248 3800334 3800351 3800352
RIo-C3-GDCP - Generator & Diff. Current Protection 8100225
8.5
Plugs and accessories

4 Pole connector 5 Pole connector 6 Pole connector 8 Pole connector 9 Pole connector 11 Pole connector 12Pole connector Cross connection link for power and CAN Termination resistor 120 ohm 3401038 3401191 3401039 3401192 3401289 3401193 3401290 3100295 5100091
8.6
Other spare parts

Colour graphics display
A number of different types and sizes of colour graphics displays can be used with the DataChief C20. The minimum requirements to these are:
272
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Replaceable parts
Screen resolution:
1024 x 768 pixels
To order a replacement unit specify the following information: Colour graphics display size (17, 19, 21 or bigger both CRT and flat screen types are available).
Remote Operator Station computer
The personal computer unit forming part of the Remote Operator Station is loaded with DataChief C20 system software and configuration software unique for each vessel. To order a replacement unit specify the following information: Vessel name. Ship yard name. Hull number. Where located on the ship
8.7
Configuration settings
There are no hardware configuration settings such as dip switches for any of the modules.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
273
8.8
Drawings
This chapter contains drawings refered to in other parts of the manual: - Local Operator Station - Midi Operator Station - Watch Bridge Unit - Watch Cabin Unit - RAi-16 - Remote Analogue input module - RAi-10TC - Remote Analogue input thermo coupler - RDi-32 - Remote Digital input module - RDi-32a - Remote Digital input module - RAo-8 - Remote Analogue output module - RDo-16 - Remote Digital output module - RIo-C1 - Remote Input Output module - RIo-C2 - Remote Input Output module - RIo-C3 - Generator protection module - dPSC - Dual Process Segment Controller
274
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Replaceable parts
Local Operator Station, Watch Bridge Unit & Watch Cabin Unit
Note: Rotate end covers 180 deg. to change between flush and wall mounting. Use countersunk head screws.
Mounting screws: M5 Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminals Supply Voltage: 18 - 32 V DC Consumption: 6W maximum Unit weight: 1.4kg Temperature range: - 15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
275
MOS33 Midi Operator Station
Mounting screws: M5 M5 Mounting screws: Cable through plug plug Cableconnections: connections: Through Supply Voltage: 18 32-V DC Supply Voltage: 18 32 V DC Consumption: 10 10W W maximum Consumption: maximum Unit weight: 1.5 kg Unit weight: 1.0kg Temperature range: -10 Deg. C to +50 Temperature range: -15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C Deg. C
276
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Replaceable parts
RAi-16 Remote Analogue input module
Note: Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs when replacing the unit - do not disconnect the cables. Unscrew and rotate the label to change the reading direction.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
277
RAi-10tc Remote Analogue input module
Mounting screws: M5 Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminals Supply Voltage: 18 - 32 V DC Consumption: 10W maximum Unit weight: 1.8 kg Temperature range: - 15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
278
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Replaceable parts
RDi-32 & 32a Remote Digital input module
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
279
RAo-8 Remote Analogue output module
280
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Replaceable parts
RDo-16 Remote Digital output module
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
281
RIO-C1 Remote Input Output module
282
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Replaceable parts
RIO-C2 Remote Input Output module
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
283
RIO-C3 Generator protection
Mounting screws: M5 Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminals Supply Voltage: 18 - 32 V DC Consumption: 15 W maximum Unit weight: 2.0 kg Temperature range: - 15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
284
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Replaceable parts
RIO-C4 Generator monitoring and control
Mounting screws: M5 Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminals Supply Voltage: 18 - 32 V DC Consumption: 15 W maximum Unit weight: 2.0 kg Temperature range: - 15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
285
VCC Voltage Converter Controller
286
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Replaceable parts
dPSC Dual Process Segment Controller
Mounting screws: M5 Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminals Supply Voltage: 18 - 32 V DC Consumption: 15W maximum Unit weight: 1.6 kg Temperature range: -15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
287
9 APPENDIX
9.1 Introduction
This appendix contains definitions, abbreviations and references used in this document. The following subjects are covered: - Abbreviations - References
288
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Appendix
9.2
Abbreviations
9.2.1
AC BIST CAN CE CD CCR dPSC DC DPU ECR EMC EMD GUI IACS IMO I/O IFH IFL IP KMSS LAN LAS LCD LED LOS LRU MCU NC NO OCP PC PCB PDO PDS PLC PMS PSS RAi RAi tc
General
Alternating Current Built In System Test Control Area Network Communite Europeen Compact Disc Cargo Control Room Dual Process Segment Controller DataChief Distributed Processing Unit Engine Control Room Electro Magnetic Compatibility European union Maritime Directorate Graphic User Interface International Assocciation of Class Societies International Maritime Organisation Input/Output Instrument Failure High alarm Instrument Failure Low alarm Ingress Protection Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems Local area Network Local Alarm System Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Local Operator Station Line Replaceable Unit Main Computer Unit Normal Closed Normal Open Operator Control Panel Personal Computer Printed Circuit Board Process Data Object Process Data Segment Programmable Logic Controller Power Management System Process Segment Starcoupler Remote Analogue Input unit Remote Analogue Input unit for termo couplers
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
289
RAO RDI RDO ROS SGW UMS UPS UTC WBU WCU
Remote Analogue Output unit Remote Digital Input unit Remote Digital Output unit Remote Operator Station System Gateway Unmanned Machinery Space Uninterruptible Power Supply Coordinated Universal Time Watch Bridge Unit Watch Cabin Unit
9.2.2
Alarm list abbreviations
The following is a list of abbreviations used in alarm list in Remote- and Local Operator Stations.
Analogue sensors
OffSc
Offscan alarm. Indicates that the input signal is not checked for alarm situations and is not measured any more. Gradient alarm. The input signal is changing rapidly. Low alarm. When the input signal is lower than a set limit. Low-Low alarm. When the input signal is lower than a set limit. High alarm. When the input signal is higher than a set limit. High-High alarm. When the input signal is lower than a set limit. Instrument failure low alarm. Used for example when a 4 to 20 mA current loop is giving less than 4 mA. Instrument failure high alarm. Used for example when a 4 to 20 mA current loop is giving more than 20 mA. Inhibit. The input signal has been inhibited to avoid unnecessary alarms such as when the main engine is stopped.
Grad Low Lo-Lo High Hi-Hi IFL IFH Inhib
Digital sensors
OffSc Open Closed
Offscan alarm. Indicates that the input signal is not checked for alarm situations. The switch is open, such as valve open The switch is closed, such as valve closed
290
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Appendix
Short Broken Inhib
The wiring to the sensor has a short-circuit The wiring to the sensor has a open-circuit Inhibit. The input signal has been inhibited to avoid unnecessary alarms such as when the main engine is stopped.
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
291
9.3
References
DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system Instruction manual Document number: AD-0376 Item number: 0400150 DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with process control Instruction manual Document number: AD-0378 Item number: 0400152 DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with power management Instruction manual Document number: AD-0379 Item number: 0400153 DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management Instruction manual Document number: AD-0377 Item number: 0400151
292
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Instruction manual
Blank page
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
293
________________________________________________________________________________________________
DataChief C20 Instruction manual Alarm and monitoring system with process control and power management
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
294
AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Blank page
Document printing instructions

This page and all pages hereafter are not part of the manual and should not be printed!
1 2 3 4
The whole document including the front page is a single PDF-file with the document number AD-0377. Print the front page in colour. The rest of the document should be printed in black & white, 2-sided printing. References is the last section that is part of the document, after that there is various useful information not normally printed. The sheet before this one contains labels for the spine of binders. The following page(s) containing TAGS is used for internal document updating purposes only.
5 6
Tags - DO NOT PRINT!

Kilde: Library I7 Ansvar: Kjell Grntoft Dokument historie: 01.02.2002 released Brukt: AD-0377 DataChief C20 reg.no bok Version: Ingen Andre attributter i bruk: Ingen DataChief C20 AMS Denne siden innehloder alle tags som er brukt i manualen. 1 Functional description 2 Getting started 3 Operating information 4 Reference guide 5 Maintenance 6 Replaceable parts 7 Appendix
Filnavn Functional description Intro
Niv 1 3
Tag
Kommentar
c20_funcdes_01 Introduction c20_funcdes_02 MOS tech spec.
Getting started Intro ROS 1 3 c20_getstrt_01 c20_getstrt_02 Introduction Understanding the Remote Operator Station display. Access levels MOS
c20_getstrt_03 Alarm and monitoring system Intro 1
c20_operate_01 Introduction
ROS
c20_operate_02 How to access the
Watch Calling configuration.

3 3 3 3 c20_operate_03 How to enable resetting of counters c20_operate_04 How to display system information c20_operate_05 How to change time zone c20_operate_06 How to change tag parameters for an analogue channel c20_operate_07 How to change tag parameters for a digital channel c20_operate_08 How to set the intervall for selected points log c20_operate_09 How to change tag parameters c20_pcs_01 Introduction
3 3 Process control system 1 Power management system 1 Reference Guide Intro 1 3 Maintenance Intro 1 4 4
c20_pms_01
Introduction
c20_refguid_01 c20_refguid_02
Introduction Exhaust mean value tag items Introduction How to start Service console How to copy files into Remote Operator Stations. How to stop Remote Operator Stations How to start Remote Operator Stations
c20_maint_01 c20_maint_02 c20_maint_03
4 4
c20_maint_04 c20_maint_05
Replaceable parts Intro Appendix Intro 1 c20_append_01 Introduction 1 c20_parts_01 Introduction

Alarm Monitoring Control and Power Management

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Alarm Monitoring Control and Power Management

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

AD-0377 / Item number 0400151 /

The original signatures are recorded in the companys logistic database.

High voltage safety warning

EXTERNAL CARDIAC MASSAGE 1

FIRST AID IN THE EVENT OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

COMBINING EMC AND ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION

DO YOU KNOW WHAT TO DO?

Warnings and Cautions

Figure 1 DataChief C20 Remote Operator Station

Alarm and monitoring system

Process control system

Power management system

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

1.6.13 1.6.14 1.6.15 1.6.16 1.6.17 1.6.18 2

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

4.3.7 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 5

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 5

271 271 272 272 273 274

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

This manual complies with DataChief C20 software version DC 60052.07.04.

Figure 2 Typical engine control room fitted with DataChief C20.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring displays

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

for and two for

Decentralised system architecture

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

ENGINE CONTROL ROOM

DPU ROT. LIGHT/ KLAXON RESET

LOS DPU DPU

LOS DPU DPU

2 x 16 DPU CABINET 7 x 16 DPU CABINET

Figure 3 Typical configuration drawing for a passenger vessel.

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

ENGINE CONTROL ROOM

PRINTER WCU 16 group WCU 16 group

DPU ROT. LIGHT/ KLAXON

DPU RESET DPU DPU RESET N x 3 DPU CABINET

DPU DPU DPU N x 3 DPU CABINET

DPU DPU DPU N x 3 DPU CABINET

DPU DPU DPU DPU N x 4 DPU CABINET

Figure 4 Configuration drawing for an oil tanker.